2007 Honda Ridgeline Online Reference Owner`s Manual Contents

2007 Honda Ridgeline Online Reference Owner`s Manual Contents
2007 Honda Ridgeline Online Reference Owner's Manual
Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.
For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.
Contents
Owner's Identification Form
Introduction .........................................................................................................................................i
A Few Words About Safety................................................................................................................iii
Your Vehicle at a Glance..................................................................................................................... 3
Driver and Passenger Safety .............................................................................................................. 5
Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System.
Instruments and Controls................................................................................................................. 57
Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls.
Comfort and Convenience Features .............................................................................................. 121
How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.
Before Driving.................................................................................................................................. 177
What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo.
Driving .............................................................................................................................................. 193
The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer.
Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 233
The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer.
Taking Care of the Unexpected ...................................................................................................... 273
This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them.
Technical Information..................................................................................................................... 299
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.
Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ................................................................ 311
A summary of the warranties covering your new Acura, and how to contact us.
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...................................................................................................... 315
How to order manuals and other technical literature.
Index...................................................................................................................................................... I
Service Information Summary
A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.
Accord Value Package Audio System
Main Menu
Owner’s Identification
This owner’s manual should be considered
a permanent part of the vehicle and should
remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
OWNER
This owner’s manual covers all models of
the Ridgeline. You may find descriptions of
equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
ADDRESS
STREET
CITY
STATE/PROVINCE
ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
V. I. N.
DELIVERY DATE
The information and specifications included
in this publication were in effect at the time
of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and
without incurring any obligation whatsoever.
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
DEALER NAME
DEALER NO.
ADDRESS
STREET
CITY
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
STATE/PROVINCE
ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN
AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez
besoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur
en français, veuillez demander à
votre concessionnaire de
commander le numéro de pièce
33SJCC10
Main Menu
Introduction
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2007 Honda Ridgeline was a wise
investment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so
you can refer to it at any time.
As you read this manual, you will
find information that is preceded by
a
symbol. This
information is intended to help you
avoid damage to your vehicle, other
property, or the environment.
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in the
instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves
your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that
your dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique
to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be
pleased to answer any questions and concerns.
i
Main Menu
Introduction
California Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: This product contains or emits chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
Event Date Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. These devices record
front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure of any airbag system
component. This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally required
or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data
can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may
also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential and is never linked to
the vehicle owner.
California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act
The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle contain perchlorate materials - special handling
may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
ii
Main Menu
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. And operating this
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility.
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
Safety Labels − on the vehicle.
and one of
Safety Messages − preceded by a safety alert symbol
three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
Safety Headings − such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
Safety Section − such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
Instructions − how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information − please read it
carefully.
iii
Main Menu
Important Handling Information
Your vehicle has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher ground
clearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and rough
terrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier. Your vehicle also has a shorter
wheelbase, allowing it to respond quicker to the steering wheel than other sport utility vehicles with a longer
wheelbase.
In addition to these characteristics, your vehicle’s pickup bed area allows you to carry more cargo and has the dualaction tailgate to handle the items easily.
These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a high
center of gravity. This means your vehicle can tip or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wear
seat belts.
Overloading or improperly loading cargo could affect your handling and the vehicle’s stability, and could result in a
crash. Make sure the cargo is properly loaded and all items are secured in the pickup bed area.
For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read ‘‘Driving Guidelines’’ on page 194 of this manual and the
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines section on page 227 . Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in loss of
control or an accident.
iv
Main Menu
Your Vehicle at a Glance
DRIVER’S FRONT
AIRBAG (P.9, 23)
REAR VIEW MIRROR WITH
COMPASS* (P.168)
PASSENGER’S FRONT
AIRBAG (P.9, 23)
AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.133)
PARKING BRAKE
RELEASE HANDLE
(P.109)
AUXILIARY INPUT
JACK*
(P.161)
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P.111)
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS (P.122)
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM (P.128)
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
(P.83)
GLOVE BOX
(P.115)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.105)
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
(P.181)
FUEL FILL DOOR
RELEASE HANDLE
(P.179)
PARKING BRAKE
PEDAL (P.109)
Vehicle with navigation system is shown.
* : If equipped
CENTER CONSOLE
(P.113)
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS
(P.116)
CONTINUED
3
Your Vehicle at a Glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS (P.59)
GAUGES (P.70)
t
s
Main Menu
Your Vehicle at a Glance
MOONROOF SWITCH*2
(P.108)
INSTRUMENT PANEL
SHIFT LEVER (P.197)
BRIGHTNESS (P.78)
VTM-4 LOCK (P.203)
HORN*1
MULTI-CONTROL LEVER
(WINDSHIELD WIPERS/
WASHERS/TURN SIGNALS/
HEADLIGHT HIGH BEAMS)
(P.75)
SELECT BUTTON
(P.70)
BED LIGHT SWITCH
(P.120)
PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
(P.29)
RESET BUTTON
(P.70)
HEADLIGHT CONTROL
DIAL (P.76)
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
(P.79)
VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST (VSA)
SYSTEM OFF SWITCH
(P.211)
CRUISE BUTTON
(P.165)
CRUISE CONTROLS
(P.165)
INTERIOR LIGHT
CONTROL SWITCH
STEERING WHEEL
(P.118)
ADJUSTMENT (P.79)
REMOTE AUDIO
VOICE CONTROL
CONTROLS*2 (P.161) SWITCHES*3
Vehicle with navigation system is shown.
SEAT HEATERS*2
(P.104)
* 1 : To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘H’’ logo.
* 2 : If equipped.
* 3 : Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.
4
Main Menu
Driver and Passenger Safety
Important Safety Precautions .......... 6
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features........ 7
Seat Belts ........................................ 8
Airbags ............................................ 9
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 11
1. Close and Lock the Doors ...... 11
2. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 11
3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............. 12
4. Adjust the Head Restraints .... 13
5. Fasten and Position the
Seat Belts .............................. 14
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position ................................. 15
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 16
Additional Safety Precautions .... 17
Additional Information About Your
Seat Belts .................................. 18
Seat Belt System Components ... 18
Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 19
Automatic Seat Belt
Tensioners ................................ 19
Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 20
Additional Information About
Your Airbags ............................ 21
Airbag System Components ....... 21
How Your Front Airbags
Work.......................................... 23
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 26
How your Side Curtain Airbags
Work.......................................... 28
How the SRS Indicator Works ... 28
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 29
How the Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 29
Airbag Service .............................. 30
Additional Safety Precautions .... 31
Protecting Children−General
Guidelines ................................. 32
All Children Must Be
Restrained ................................ 32
All Children Should Sit in a
Back Seat .................................. 33
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks .......... 33
If You Must Drive with Several
Children .................................... 35
If a Child Requires Close
Attention ................................... 35
Additional Safety Precautions .... 36
Protecting Infants and Small
Children .................................... 37
Protecting Infants ........................ 37
Protecting Small Children .......... 38
Selecting a Child Seat ...................... 39
Installing a Child Seat ..................... 40
With LATCH ................................ 41
With a Lap/Shoulder Belt .......... 44
With a Tether ............................... 46
Protecting Larger Children ............ 49
Checking Seat Belt Fit ................ 49
Using a Booster Seat ................... 50
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front .......................................... 51
Additional Safety Precautions .... 52
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 53
Safety Labels .................................... 54
5
Driver and Passenger Safety
This section gives you important
information about how to protect
yourself and your passengers. It
shows you how to use seat belts. It
explains how your airbags work. And
it tells you how to properly restrain
infants and children in your vehicle.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Important Safety Precautions
You’ll find many safety
recommendations throughout this
section, and throughout this manual.
The recommendations on this page
are the ones we consider to be the
most important.
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of collisions. Airbags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with airbags,
make sure you and your passenger
always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly (see page 14 ).
Restrain All Children
Children age 12 and under should
ride properly restrained in a back
seat, not the front seat. Infants and
small children should be restrained
in a child seat. Larger children
should use a booster seat and a lap/
shoulder belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat
(see pages 32 − 52 ).
Be Aware of Airbag Hazards
While airbags can save lives, they
can cause serious or fatal injuries to
occupants who sit too close to them,
or are not properly restrained.
Infants, young children, and short
adults are at the greatest risk. Be
sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
Don’t Drink and Drive
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
6
every additional drink. So don’t drink
and drive, and don’t let your friends
drink and drive, either.
Control Your Speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current
conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
Condition
Having a tire blowout or a
mechanical failure can be extremely
hazardous. To reduce the possibility
of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
and perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance (see page 235 ).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
(7)
(9) (10) (3)
(1)
(4)
(11)
Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment, front and rear crush
zones, a collapsible steering column,
and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.
(6)
(5) (8)
(2)
(2)
(1) Safety Cage
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints
(5) Collapsible Steering Column
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(9) Door Locks
(10) Side Airbags
(11) Side Curtain Airbags
However, you and your passengers
can’t take full advantage of these
features unless you remain sitting in
a proper position and always wear
your seat belts. In fact, some safety
features can contribute to injuries if
they are not used properly.
The following pages explain how you
can take an active role in protecting
yourself and your passengers.
7
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your vehicle is equipped with many
features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.
(10)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Seat Belts
Your vehicle is equipped with seat
belts in all seating positions.
The pickup bed is not equipped with
seats or seat belts. Do not let anyone
ride in the pickup bed as they can
easily be thrown out and be killed or
seriously injured.
Your seat belt system also includes
an indicator on the instrument panel
and a beeper to remind you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
Why Wear Seat Belts
Seat belts are the single most
effective safety device for adults and
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.)
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
Be sure you and your
passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
In addition, most states and all
Canadian provinces require you to
wear seat belts.
Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including frontal,
side and rear impacts, and
rollovers.
When properly worn, seat belts:
Allowing passengers to ride in
the pickup bed or on the tailgate
can result in death or serious
injury in a crash.
Make sure all passengers ride
in a seat and wear a seat belt
properly.
8
Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
vehicle’s built-in safety features.
Help keep you from being thrown
against the inside of the vehicle
and against other occupants.
Keep you from being thrown out
of the vehicle.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
Of course, seat belts cannot
completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts
can reduce your risk of serious
injury.
What you should do: Always wear
your seat belt, and make sure you
wear it properly.
Your vehicle has a supplemental
restraint system (SRS) with front
airbags to help protect the heads and
chests of the driver and a front seat
passenger during a moderate to
severe frontal collision (see page
23 for more information on how
your front airbags work).
Your vehicle has side airbags to help
protect the upper torso of the driver
or a front seat passenger during a
moderate to severe side impact (see
page 26 for more information on how
your side airbags work).
CONTINUED
9
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
The most important things you need
to know about your airbags are:
Airbags do not replace seat belts.
They are designed to supplement
the seat belts.
Airbags offer no protection in rear
impacts, or minor frontal or side
collisions.
Airbags can pose serious hazards.
Your vehicle has side curtain airbags
to help protect the heads of the
driver, front passenger, and
passengers in the outer rear seating
positions during a moderate to
severe side impact or rollover (see
page 28 for more information on how
your side curtain airbags work).
10
To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force. So
while airbags help save lives, they
can cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.
What you should do: Always wear
your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back from the
steering wheel as possible while
allowing full control of the vehicle. A
front passenger should move their
seat as far back from the dashboard
as possible.
The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
can maximize your safety.
Remember, however, that no safety
system can prevent all injuries or
deaths that can occur in a severe
crash, even when seat belts are
properly worn and the airbags deploy.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Adults and Teens
See pages 32 − 52 for important
guidelines on how to properly
protect infants, small children, and
larger children who ride in your
vehicle.
1.Close and Lock the Doors
After everyone has entered the
vehicle, be sure the doors are closed
and locked. Before driving, be sure
the tailgate is also closed.
Locking the doors reduces the
chance of someone being thrown out
of the vehicle during a crash, and it
helps prevent passengers from
accidentally opening a door and
falling out.
Your vehicle has a door and
tailgate open monitor on
the instrument panel to indicate
when a specific door or the tailgate is
not tightly closed.
2.Adjust the Front Seats
Driver and Passenger Safety
Introduction
The following pages provide
instructions on how to properly
protect the driver, adult passengers,
and teenage children who are large
enough and mature enough to drive
or ride in the front.
Your vehicle also has an
In-Bed Trunk open
indicator to show when the In-Bed
Trunk lid is not tightly closed (see
page 96 ).
Locking the doors also helps prevent
an outsider from unexpectedly
opening a door when you come to a
stop.
See page 83 for how to lock the
doors, and page 64 for how the door
and tailgate open monitor works.
Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the
rear as possible while allowing you to
maintain full control of the vehicle.
Have a front passenger adjust their
seat as far to the rear as possible.
CONTINUED
11
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Adults and Teens
If you sit too close to the steering
wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front
airbag, or by striking the steering
wheel or dashboard.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that drivers
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest.
If you cannot get far enough away
from the steering wheel and still
reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some
type of adaptive equipment may help.
3.Adjust the Seat-Backs
Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the
front airbags as possible.
On RT, RTX, and Canadian LX models
Once your seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure it
is locked into position. See page
98 for how to adjust the front seats.
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel.
Passengers with adjustable seatbacks should also adjust their seatback to a comfortable, upright
position.
12
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Adults and Teens
4.Adjust the Head Restraints
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position, and sit well
back in the seat.
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
reduces the protective capability of
the belt. It also increases the chance
of sliding under the belt in a crash
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury.
See pages 98 and 100 for how to
adjust the seat-backs.
Improperly positioning head
restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Adjust the driver’s head restraint so
the back of your head rests against
the center of the restraint.
Have passengers adjust their head
restraints properly as well. Taller
persons should adjust their restraint
as high as possible.
Make sure head restraints are
in place and positioned properly
before driving.
Properly adjusted head restraints
will help protect occupants from
whiplash and other crash injuries.
See page 102 for how to adjust the
head restraints.
13
Driver and Passenger Safety
Reclining the seat-back too far
can result in serious injury or
death in a crash.
When a passenger is seated in the
rear center seating position, make
sure the center head restraint is
adjusted to its highest position.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Adults and Teens
If necessary, pull up on the belt again
to remove any slack, then check that
the belt rests across the center of
your chest and over your shoulder.
5.Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts
Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Check that
the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash.
This spreads the forces of a crash
over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
Improperly positioning the seat
belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are
properly positioned before
driving.
If the seat belt touches or crosses
your neck, or if it crosses your arm
instead of your shoulder, you need to
adjust the seat belt anchor height.
14
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Adults and Teens
RELEASE
BUTTONS
Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause
If a seat belt does not seem to work
as it should, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.
No one should sit in a seat with an
inoperative seat belt. Using a seat
The front seats have adjustable seat
belt anchors. To adjust the height of
an anchor, squeeze the two release
buttons, and slide the anchor up or
down as needed (it has four
positions).
belt that is not working properly can
result in serious injury or death.
Have your dealer check the belt as
soon as possible.
See page 18 for additional
information about your seat belts
and how to take care of them.
Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.
CONTINUED
15
Driver and Passenger Safety
very serious injuries in a crash.
6.Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and put on seat belts, it is
very important that they continue to
sit upright, well back in their seats,
with their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is parked and the engine is
off.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Adults and Teens
In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured in a crash
by striking interior parts of the
vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.
Advice for Pregnant Women
This will reduce the risk of injuries
to both you and your unborn child
that can be caused by a crash or an
inflating front airbag.
Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in
the seat, with your feet on the
floor.
16
When driving, remember to sit
upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full
control of the vehicle. When riding
as a front passenger, adjust the seat
as far back as possible.
If you are pregnant, the best way to
protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.
Each time you have a checkup, ask
your doctor if it’s okay for you to
drive.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Adults and Teens
Additional Safety Precautions
Two people should never use the
same seat belt. If they do, they
Keep your hands and arms away
from the airbag covers. If your
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
hands or arms are close to an
airbag cover, they could be injured
if the airbag inflates.
seriously injured in a crash.
Never let passengers ride in the
pickup bed. If they do, they could
be killed or very seriously injured
in a crash.
Never let passengers ride inside a
truck cap (shell). They could be
killed or injured in a crash, or
become ill or even die from carbon
monoxide poisoning if engine
exhaust enters the cap.
Passengers should not stand up or
change seats while the vehicle is
moving. A passenger who is not
Do not put any accessories on seat
belts. Devices intended to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can
reduce the protective capability of
the seat belt and increase the
chance of serious injury in a crash.
Do not place hard or sharp objects
between yourself and a front
airbag. Carrying hard or sharp
objects on your lap, or driving with
a pipe or other sharp object in
your mouth, can result in injuries
if your front airbag inflates.
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers. Objects on
the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
could interfere with the proper
operation of the airbags or be
propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
Do not attach solid objects on or
near a door. If a side airbag or a
side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
holder or other solid object
attached on or near the door could
be propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.
wearing a seat belt during a crash
or emergency stop can be thrown
against the inside of the vehicle,
against other occupants, or out of
the vehicle.
17
Driver and Passenger Safety
Never let passengers ride in the
area in front of a folded-up rear
seat. If they do, they could be very
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components
Your seat belt system includes lap/
shoulder belts in all five seating
positions. The front seat belts are
also equipped with automatic seat
belt tensioners.
This system uses the same sensors
as the front airbags to monitor
whether the front seat belts are
latched or unlatched, and how much
weight is on the front passenger’s
seat (see pages 25 and 26 ).
The seat belt system
includes an indicator on the
instrument panel and a beeper to
remind you and your passengers to
fasten your seat belts.
This system monitors the front seat
belts. If you turn the ignition switch
to the ON (II) position before your
seat belt is fastened, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash. If
your seat belt is not fastened before
18
the beeper stops, the indicator will
stop flashing but remain on.
If a front passenger does not fasten
their seat belt, the indicator will
come on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
If either the driver or a front
passenger does not fasten their seat
belt while driving, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals.
When no one is sitting in the front
passenger’s seat, or a child or small
adult is riding there, the indicator
should not come on and the beeper
should not sound.
If the indicator comes on or the
beeper sounds when the driver’s seat
belt is latched and there is no front
seat passenger and no items on the
front seat, something may be
interfering with the monitoring
system. Look for and remove:
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any objects hanging on the seat or
in the seat-back pocket.
Any object on the floor that is
touching the rear of the seat-back.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
To fasten the belt, insert the latch
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched (see page 14 for how to
properly position the belt).
To unlock the belt, press the red
PRESS button on the buckle. Guide
the belt across your body so that it
retracts completely. After exiting the
vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the
way and will not get closed in the
door.
All seat belts have an emergency
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
Driver and Passenger Safety
Lap/Shoulder Belt
The lap/shoulder belt goes over
your shoulder, across your chest,
and across your hips.
The seat belts in all positions except
the driver’s have an additional
lockable retractor that must be
activated to secure a child seat (see
page 44 ).
If the shoulder part of the belt is
pulled all the way out, the lockable
retractor will activate. The belt will
retract, but it will not allow the
passenger to move freely.
To deactivate the lockable retractor,
unlatch the buckle and let the seat
belt fully retract. To refasten the
seat belt, pull it out only as far as
needed.
For added protection, the front seat
belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in position.
CONTINUED
19
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
The tensioners are designed to
activate in any collision severe
enough to cause the front airbags to
deploy, or if a sensor detects your
vehicle is about to roll over (see page
28 ).
If a side airbag or side curtain airbag
deploys during a side impact, the
tensioner on that side of the vehicle
will also deploy.
The tensioners can also be activated
during a collision in which the front
airbags do not deploy. In this case, the
airbags would not be needed, but the
additional restraint could be helpful.
When the tensioners are activated,
the seat belts will remain tight until
they are unbuckled.
20
Seat Belt Maintenance
For safety, you should check the
condition of your seat belts regularly.
Pull each belt out fully, and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
that the latches work smoothly and
the belts retract easily. If a belt does
not retract easily, cleaning the belt
may correct the problem (see page
261 ). Any belt that is not in good
condition or working properly will
not provide good protection and
should be replaced as soon as
possible.
Honda provides a limited warranty
on seat belts. See your Honda
Warranty Information booklet for
details.
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
it must be replaced by the dealer. A
belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.
The dealer should also inspect the
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed. If the automatic seat
belt tensioners activate during a
crash, they must be replaced.
Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
needed.
Check your seat belts regularly
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Your airbag system includes:
Airbag System Components
(9) (2) (13)
(8)
(10)
(4)
(11)
(12)
(1)
(3)
(14)
(5)
(1) Driver’s Front Airbag
(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag (6)
(3) Control Unit
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(7)
(4)
(5) Side Airbags
(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor
(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors
(15)
(8) Front Impact Sensors
(14)
(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(10) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors
(11) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors/OPDS Sensors Control Unit
(12) SRS Indicator
(13) Side Curtain Airbags
(14) Side Impact Sensors (First)
(15) Side Impact Sensors (Second)
(16) Roll Rate Sensor
(7)
(16)
(15)
Two SRS (supplemental restraint
system) front airbags. The driver’s
airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’s airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG’’ (see page 23 ).
Two side airbags, one for the
driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
in the outer edges of the seatbacks. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
AIRBAG’’ (see page 26 ).
Two side curtain airbags, one for
each side of the vehicle. The
airbags are stored in the ceiling,
above the side windows. The front
and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page
26 ).
CONTINUED
21
Driver and Passenger Safety
(5)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Automatic front seat belt
tensioners (see page 19 ).
Sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe front impact,
side impact, or rollover.
Sensors that can detect whether a
child is in the passenger’s side
airbag path and signal the control
unit to turn the airbag off (see
page 27 ).
Sensors that can detect whether
the driver’s seat belt and a front
passenger’s seat belt is latched or
unlatched (see page 18 ).
A driver’s seat position sensor that
monitors the distance of the seat
from the front airbag. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force (see page
25 ).
22
Weight sensors that monitor the
weight on the front passenger’s
seat. If the weight is about 65 lbs
(29 kg) or less (the weight of an
infant or small child), the
passenger’s front airbag will be
turned off (see page 25 ).
A rollover sensor that can detect if
your vehicle is about to roll over
and signal the control unit to
deploy both side curtain airbags
and front seat belt tensioners (see
page 28 ).
A sophisticated electronic system
that continually monitors and
records information about the
sensors, the control unit, the
airbag activators, the seat belt
tensioners, and driver and front
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position.
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you to a possible
problem with your airbags,
sensors, or seat belt tensioners
(see page 28 ).
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
turned off (see page 29 ).
An indicator on the dashboard that
alerts you that the passenger’s
front airbag has been turned off
(see page 29 ).
Emergency backup power in case
your vehicle’s electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Front Airbags Work
Driver and Passenger Safety
During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.
Although both airbags normally
inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
If you ever have a moderate to
severe frontal collision, sensors will
detect the vehicle’s rapid
deceleration.
This can happen if the severity of a
collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by
the airbag would be minimal.
If the rate of deceleration is high
enough, the control unit will instantly
inflate the driver’s and front
passenger’s airbags, at the time and
with the force needed.
Only the driver’s airbag will deploy if
there is no passenger in the front
seat, or if the advanced airbag
system has turned the passenger’s
airbag off (see page 25 ).
After inflating, the front airbags
immediately deflate, so they won’t
interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
CONTINUED
23
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
The total time for inflation and
deflation is one-tenth of a second, so
fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until
they see them lying in their laps.
After a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. This is actually
powder from the airbag’s surface.
Although the powder is not harmful,
people with respiratory problems
may experience some temporary
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
24
Dual-Stage Airbags
Dual-Threshold Airbags
Your front airbags are dual-stage
airbags. This means they have two
inflation stages that can be ignited
sequentially or simultaneously,
depending on crash severity.
Your front airbags are also dualthreshold airbags. Airbags with this
feature have two deployment
thresholds that depend on whether
sensors detect the occupant is
wearing a seat belt or not.
In a more severe crash, both stages
will ignite simultaneously to provide
the quickest and greatest protection.
In a less severe crash, one stage will
ignite first, then the second stage
will ignite a split second later. This
provides longer airbag inflation time
with a little less force.
If the occupant’s belt is not latched,
the airbag will deploy at a slightly
lower threshold, because the
occupant would need extra
protection.
If the occupant’s belt is latched, the
airbag will deploy at a slightly higher
threshold, when the airbag would be
needed to supplement the protection
provided by the seat belt.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Advanced Airbags
For both advanced airbags to work
properly:
Occupants must sit upright and
wear their seat belts properly.
Do not spill any liquids on or
under the seats, cover the sensors,
or put any objects or metal items
under the front seats.
Back-seat passengers should not
put their feet under the front seats.
Failure to follow these instructions
could damage the sensors or prevent
them from working properly.
DRIVER’S
SEAT
POSITION
SENSOR
The driver’s advanced front airbag
system includes a seat position
sensor under the seat. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force, regardless of
the severity of the impact.
If there is a problem with the sensor,
the SRS indicator will come on, and
the airbag will inflate in the normal
manner regardless of the driver’s
seating position.
PASSENGER’S
SEAT WEIGHT
SENSOR
The passenger’s advanced front
airbag system has weight sensors
under the seat. Although Honda
does not encourage carrying an
infant or small child in front, if the
sensors detect the weight of an
infant or small child (up to about 65
lbs or 29 kg), the system will
automatically turn the passenger’s
front airbag off.
Be aware that objects placed on the
passenger’s seat can also cause the
airbag to be turned off. CONTINUED
25
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbagcaused injuries to short drivers and
children who ride in front.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
When the airbag is turned off, a
‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator in
the center of the dashboard comes
on (see page 29 ).
If the weight sensors detect there is
no passenger in the front seat, the
airbag will be off. However, the
passenger airbag off indicator will
not come on.
To ensure that the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system will
work properly, do not do anything
that would increase or decrease the
weight on the front passenger’s seat.
This includes:
26
A rear passenger pushing or
pulling on the back of the front
passenger’s seat.
How Your Side Airbags Work
Moving the front seat forcibly
back against cargo on the seat or
floor behind it.
Hanging heavy items on the front
passenger seat, or placing heavy
items in the seat-back pocket.
Also, make sure the floor mat behind
the front passenger’s seat is hooked
to the floor mat anchor (see page
261 ). If it is not, the mat may
interfere with the proper operation
of the sensors and operation of the
seat.
If you ever have a moderate to
severe side impact, sensors will
detect rapid acceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag and activate the seat belt
tensioner.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
Side Airbag Cutoff System
Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff
system designed primarily to protect
a child riding in the front passenger’s
seat.
Although Honda does not encourage
children to ride in front, if sensors in
the seat detect a child has leaned
into the side airbag’s deployment
path, the airbag will shut off.
The side airbag may also shut off if a
short adult leans sideways, or a
larger adult slouches and leans
sideways into the airbag’s
deployment path.
If the side airbag off indicator comes
on (see page 29 ), have the
passenger sit upright. Once the
passenger is out of the airbag’s
deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
indicator will go out.
There will be some delay between
the moment the passenger moves
into or out of the airbag deployment
path and when the indicator comes
on or goes off.
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or other object as a
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.
Objects placed on the front
passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.
27
Driver and Passenger Safety
Only one airbag will deploy during a
side impact. If the impact is on the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s
side airbag will deploy even if there
is no passenger.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
In a Rollover
A rollover sensor monitors the
degree and rate your vehicle may roll
over and automatically deploy the
side curtain airbags and activate the
front seat belt tensioners (see page
19 ).
In a rollover toward the front
passenger’s side of the vehicle, both
side curtain airbags will inflate and
the front seat belt tensioners will
activate even if there are no
occupants on that side of the vehicle.
In a Side Impact
In a moderate to severe side impact,
sensors will detect rapid acceleration
and signal the control unit to
instantly inflate the side curtain
airbag and activate the seat belt
tensioner on the driver’s or the
passenger’s side of the vehicle.
If the impact is on the passenger’s
side, the passenger’s side curtain
airbag will inflate even if there are no
occupants on that side of the vehicle.
28
To get the best protection from the
side curtain airbags, occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
How the SRS Indicator Works
The SRS indicator alerts
you to a potential problem
with your airbags or seat belt
tensioners.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, this indicator
comes on for several seconds then
goes off. This tells you the system is
working properly.
If the indicator comes on at any
other time, or does not come on at all,
you should have the system checked
by your dealer. For example:
If the SRS indicator does not come
on after you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
If the indicator stays on after the
engine starts.
If the indicator comes on or
flashes on and off while you drive.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Ignoring the SRS indicator can
result in serious injury or death
if the airbag systems or
tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible if
the SRS indicator alerts you to
a possible problem.
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works
U.S.
How the Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator Works
Canada
This indicator
alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
automatically shut off. It does not
mean there is a problem with your
side airbags.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the indicator
should come on for several seconds
and then go off (see page 62 ). If it
doesn’t come on, stays on, or comes
on while driving without a passenger
in the front seat, have the system
checked.
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
U.S.
Canada
This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s front airbag has been
shut off because weight sensors
detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less
(the weight of an infant or small
child) on the front passenger’s seat.
It does not mean there is a problem
with the airbag.
CONTINUED
29
Driver and Passenger Safety
If you see any of these indications,
the airbags and seat belt tensioners
may not work properly when you
need them.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Be aware that objects placed on the
front seat can cause the indicator to
come on.
If no weight is detected on the front
seat, the airbag will be automatically
shut off. However, the indicator will
not come on.
The passenger airbag off indicator
may come on and off repeatedly if
the total weight on the seat is near
the airbag cutoff threshold.
If an adult or teenage passenger is
riding in front, move the seat as far
to the rear as possible, and have the
passenger sit upright and wear the
seat belt properly.
If the indicator comes on with no
front seat passenger and no objects
on the seat, or with an adult riding
there, something may be interfering
with the weight sensors. Look for
and remove:
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any object, hanging on the seat or
in the seat-back pocket.
Any object that is touching the
rear of the seat-back.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible.
Airbag Service
Your airbag systems are virtually
maintenance free, and there are no
parts you can safely service.
However, you must have your
vehicle serviced if:
An airbag ever inflates. Any airbag
that has deployed must be
replaced along with the control
unit and other related parts. Any
seat belt tensioner that activates
must also be replaced.
Do not try to remove or replace
any airbag by yourself. This must
be done by an authorized dealer or
a knowledgeable body shop.
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
problem. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. If you ignore this
indication, your airbags may not
operate properly.
30
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
If your vehicle has a moderate to
severe impact. Even if your
Do not attempt to deactivate your
airbags. Together, airbags and
seat belts provide the best
protection.
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason. Tampering could cause
the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
Do not expose the front passenger’s
seat-back to liquid. If water or
another liquid soaks into a seatback, it can prevent the side airbag
cutoff system from working
properly.
Do not cover or replace front seatback covers without consulting
your dealer. Improperly replacing
or covering front seat-back covers
can prevent your side airbags from
inflating during a side impact.
Do not remove or modify a front
seat without consulting your
dealer. This could make the
driver’s seat position sensor or the
front passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective. If it is necessary to
remove or modify a front seat to
accommodate a person with
disabilities, first contact Honda
Automobile Customer Service at
(800) 999-1009.
31
Driver and Passenger Safety
airbags do not inflate, your dealer
should inspect the driver’s seat
position sensor, the front
passenger’s weight sensors, the
front seat belt tensioners, and all
seat belts worn during the crash to
make sure they are operating
properly.
Additional Safety Precautions
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
All Children Must Be Restrained
Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because
they are either unrestrained or not
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle
accidents are the number one cause
of the death of children ages 12 and
under.
Children depend on adults to protect
them. However, despite their best
intentions, many adults do not know
how to properly protect child
passengers.
If you have children, or ever need to
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.
32
To reduce the number of child
deaths and injuries, every state and
Canadian province requires that
infants and children be properly
restrained when they ride in a
vehicle.
Infants and small children must be
restrained in an approved child seat
that is properly secured to the
vehicle (see pages 37 − 48 ).
Children who are unrestrained
or improperly restrained can be
seriously injured or killed in a
crash.
Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. A
larger child should be properly
restrained with a seat belt and
use a booster seat if necessary.
Larger children must be restrained
with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
a booster seat until the seat belt fits
them properly (see pages 49 − 52 ).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
Children who ride in the back are
less likely to be injured by striking
interior vehicle parts during a
collision or hard braking. Also,
children cannot be injured by an
inflating front airbag when they ride
in the back.
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks
Front airbags have been designed to
help protect adults in a moderate to
severe frontal collision. To do this,
the passenger’s front airbag is quite
large, and it can inflate with enough
force to cause very serious injuries.
Even though your vehicle has an
advanced front airbag system that
automatically turns the passenger’s
front airbag off (see page 29 ),
please follow these guidelines:
Infants
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag. If
the airbag inflates, it can hit the back
of the child seat with enough force
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.
Small Children
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous. If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure a small child.
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown child
seats are also at risk of being injured
or killed by an inflating passenger’s
front airbag. Whenever possible,
larger children should sit in the back
seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
be properly restrained with a seat
belt (see page 49 for important
information about protecting larger
children).
CONTINUED
33
Driver and Passenger Safety
All Children Should Sit in a Back
Seat
According to accident statistics,
children of all ages and sizes are
safer when they are restrained in a
back seat. The National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration and
Transport Canada recommend that
all children aged 12 and under be
properly restrained in a back seat.
Some states have laws restricting
where children may ride.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warning labels on the dashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
U.S. Models
SUN VISORS
Canadian Models
SUN VISORS
34
DASHBOARD
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
Place the largest child in the front
seat, provided the child is large
enough to wear the lap/shoulder
belt properly (see page 49 ).
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible (see pages 98 and
100).
If a Child Requires Close
Attention
Many parents say they prefer to put
an infant or a small child in the front
passenger seat so they can watch the
child, or because the child requires
attention.
If a child requires close physical
attention or frequent visual contact,
we strongly recommend that another
adult ride with the child in the back
seat. The back seat is far safer for a
child than the front.
Placing a child in the front seat
exposes the child to hazards in a
frontal collision, and paying close
attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
driving, placing both of you at risk.
Have the child sit upright and well
back in the seat (see page 15 ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see page
14 ).
35
Driver and Passenger Safety
If You Must Drive with Several
Children
Your vehicle has a back seat where
children can be properly restrained.
If you ever have to carry a group of
children, and a child must ride in
front:
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
Additional Safety Precautions
Never hold an infant or child on
your lap. If you are not wearing a
seat belt in a crash, you could be
thrown forward and crush the
child against the dashboard or a
seat-back. If you are wearing a
seat belt, the child can be torn
from your arms and be seriously
hurt or killed.
Never put a seat belt over yourself
and a child. During a crash, the
belt could press deep into the child
and cause serious or fatal injuries.
Never let two children use the
same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Make sure any unused seat belt
that a child can reach is buckled,
the lockable retractor is activated,
and the belt is fully retracted and
locked. If a child wraps a loose
36
seat belt around their neck, they
can be seriously or fatally injured.
(See pages 44 and 45 for how to
activate and deactivate the
lockable retractor.)
Use the childproof door locks to
prevent children from opening the
rear doors. This can prevent
children from accidentally falling
out (see page 84 ).
Do not leave children alone in a
vehicle. Leaving children without
adult supervision is illegal in most
states and Canadian provinces,
and can be very hazardous.
For example, infants and small
children left in a vehicle on a hot
day can die from heatstroke. A
child left alone with the key in the
ignition switch can accidentally set
the vehicle in motion, possibly
injuring themselves or others.
Lock all doors and the In-Bed
Trunk when your vehicle is not in
use. Children who play in vehicles
can accidentally get trapped inside.
Teach your children not to play in
or around vehicles. Know how to
operate the emergency In-Bed
Trunk opener and decide if your
children should be shown how to
use this feature (see page 96 ).
Teach your children not to play on
the pickup bed. Opening or
closing the tailgate could cause
accidental injuries.
Keep vehicle keys/remote
transmitters out of the reach of
children. Even very young
children learn how to unlock
vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
switch, and open the windows,
which can lead to accidental injury
or death.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Infants
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in
a forward-facing position. If placed
facing forward, an infant could be
very seriously injured during a
frontal collision.
Child Seat Type
An infant must be properly
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining
child seat until the child reaches the
seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat, and the child is at least
one year old.
Child Seat Placement
A rear-facing child seat can be placed
in any seating position in the back
seat, but not in the front. Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front
seat.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates, it can hit the back of the
child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.
When properly installed, a rearfacing child seat may prevent the
driver or a front passenger from
moving their seat as far back as
recommended, or from locking their
seat-back in the desired position.
It can also interfere with proper
operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.
CONTINUED
37
Driver and Passenger Safety
Two types of seats may be used: a
seat designed exclusively for infants,
or a convertible seat used in the rearfacing, reclining mode.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Infants and Small Children
In any of these situations, we
strongly recommend that you install
the child seat directly behind the
front passenger’s seat, move the seat
as far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get
a smaller rear-facing child seat.
Protecting Small Children
Child Seat Placement
We strongly recommend placing a
forward-facing child seat in a back
seat, not the front.
Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death during a
collision.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s airbag can be
hazardous. If the vehicle seat is too
Child Seat Type
Always place a rear-facing child
seat in the back seat, not the
front.
A child who is at least one year old,
and who fits within the child seat
maker’s weight and height limits,
should be restrained in a forwardfacing, upright child seat.
Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a fivepoint harness system as shown.
38
We also recommend that a small
child use the child seat until the child
reaches the weight or height limit
for the seat.
far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating airbag can strike the child
with enough force to cause very
serious or fatal injuries.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat
If it is necessary to put a forwardfacing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, and be sure the child seat is
firmly secured to the vehicle and the
child is properly strapped in the seat.
Selecting a Child Seat
When buying a child seat, you need
to choose either a conventional child
seat, or one designed for use with
the lower anchors and tethers for
children (LATCH) system.
Conventional child seats must be
secured to a vehicle with a seat belt,
whereas LATCH-compatible seats
are secured by attaching the seat to
hardware built into each rear seating
position in the back seat.
In seating positions and vehicles not
equipped with LATCH, a LATCHcompatible child seat can be installed
using a seat belt.
Whatever type of seat you choose, to
provide proper protection, a child
seat should meet three
requirements:
1. The child seat should meet U.S. or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213. Look for FMVSS
213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.
Placing a forward-facing child
seat in the front seat can result
in serious injury or death if the
front airbag inflates.
If you must place a forwardfacing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible, and properly restrain
the child.
Since LATCH-compatible child seats
are easier to install and reduce the
possibility of improper installation,
we recommend selecting this style.
2. The child seat should be of the
proper type and size to fit the child.
Rear-facing for infants, forwardfacing for small children.
We also recommend selecting a
LATCH-compatible seat with a rigid,
rather than a flexible, anchor (see
page 41 ).
CONTINUED
39
Driver and Passenger Safety
Even with advanced front airbags
that automatically turn the
passenger’s front airbag off (see
page 29 ), a back seat is the safest
place for a small child.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat
3. The child seat should fit the
vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.
Before purchasing a conventional
child seat, or using a previously
purchased one, we recommend that
you test the seat in the specific
vehicle seating position or positions
where the seat will be used.
Installing a Child Seat
After selecting a proper child seat
and a good place to install the seat,
there are three main steps in
installing the seat:
1. Properly secure the child seat to
the vehicle. All child seats must be
secured to the vehicle with the lap
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with
the LATCH (lower anchors and
tethers for children) system. A
child whose seat is not properly
secured to the vehicle can be
endangered in a crash.
2. Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured. After installing a child
seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
A child seat secured with a seat belt
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, it does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side
40
movement can be expected and
should not reduce the child seat’s
effectiveness.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured.
3. Secure the child in the child seat.
Make sure the child is properly
strapped in the child seat
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions. A child who is not
properly secured in a child seat
can be seriously injured in a crash.
The following pages provide
guidelines on how to properly install
a child seat. A forward-facing child
seat is used in all examples, but the
instructions are the same for rearfacing child seats.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Installing a Child Seat
The lower anchors are located
between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH.
The location of each lower anchor is
indicated by a small button above the
anchor point.
Whenever using the center tether
anchor point, make sure to push
down the head restraint to the lowest
position, route the strap over the
seat-back, then around the upper
guide before attaching the tether
strap hook to the center tether
anchor (see page 46 ).
BUTTON
LATCH
ANCHOR
POINTS
To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat:
1. If needed, move the seat belt
buckle or tongue away from the
lower anchors.
2. Make sure there are no objects
near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
UPPER GUIDE
CENTER TETHER ANCHOR
3. On the center seating position
When using the tether strap on
the child seat, attach the tether
strap hook to the center tether
anchor before installing the child
seat to the lower anchors for the
LATCH system, because the
center tether anchor is positioned
behind the child seat.
CONTINUED
41
Driver and Passenger Safety
Installing a Child Seat with
LATCH
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (lower anchors and tethers
for children) at the rear seats.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Installing a Child Seat
Make sure the head restraint is in
the lowest position. Lift the cover,
then route the tether strap around
the upper guide. Route the tether
strap downward properly, making
sure the strap is not twisted, then
attach the strap hook to the center
tether anchor.
Rigid type
4. Place the child seat on the vehicle
seat, then attach the seat to the
lower anchors according to the
child seat maker’s instructions.
Some LATCH-compatible seats
have a rigid-type connector as
shown above.
42
Flexible type
Other LATCH-compatible seats
have a flexible-type connector as
shown above.
5. Whatever type you have, follow
the child seat maker’s instructions
for adjusting or tightening the fit.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Installing a Child Seat
UPPER GUIDE
TETHER ANCHOR
6. On the outer seating position
Lift the head restraint (see page
102), then route the tether strap
over the seat-back and through
the head restraint legs.
Lift the cover, then route the
tether strap around the upper
guide. Route the tether strap
downward properly, making sure
the strap is not twisted, then
attach the strap hook to the tether
anchor on the outside of the seat
bottom (see page 46 ).
Center Position
Driver and Passenger Safety
Outer Position
UPPER GUIDE
TETHER ANCHOR
7. Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
8. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
43
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in
all seating positions except the
driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
If you place the child seat in the rear
center seating position and use the
tether strap for additional security,
make sure to push down the head
restraint to the lowest position and
hook the tether strap hook to the
anchor before securing the child seat
with the lap/shoulder belt. Refer to
page 46 for how to route the tether
strap properly.
44
1. With the child seat in the desired
seating position, route the belt
through the child seat according
to the seat maker’s instructions,
then insert the latch plate into the
buckle.
2. To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor.
3. After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked, and
you will need to repeat these steps.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Installing a Child Seat
4. After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle, and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure.
5. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
To remove slack, it may help to
put weight on the child seat, or
push on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.
45
Driver and Passenger Safety
To deactivate the lockable retractor
and remove a child seat, unlatch the
buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let
the belt fully retract.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with a
Tether
COVER
CENTER
TETHER
ANCHOR
When using a tether anchor, always
hook the tether strap through the
upper guide to route it properly.
Using an Outer Tether Anchor
UPPER GUIDE
Since a tether can provide additional
security to the lap/shoulder belt
installation, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.
UPPER
GUIDE
OUTER
TETHER
ANCHOR
A child seat with a tether can be
installed in any seating position in
the back seat.
Each outer seating position has a
tether anchor at the outside of the
seat bottom. The center seating
position has a tether anchor between
the lower anchors for the LATCHcompatible child seat. Each anchor
point is shown above.
46
OUTER TETHER ANCHOR
1. After properly securing the child
seat (see page 44 ), lift the head
restraint, then route the tether
strap over the seat-back and
through the head restraint legs.
2. Lift the cover, then hook the
tether strap through the upper
guide as shown.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Installing a Child Seat
3. Route the tether strap downward
properly, making sure the strap is
not twisted.
5. Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
UPPER GUIDE
1. Place the child seat on the rear
seat.
2. Push down the rear center head
restraint to the lowest position.
CENTER TETHER ANCHOR
3. Route the tether strap over the
seat-back, lift the cover, then hook
the tether strap through the upper
guide as shown.
4. Route the tether strap downward
properly along the seat-back,
making sure the strap is not
twisted.
CONTINUED
47
Driver and Passenger Safety
4. Attach the tether strap hook to the
outer tether anchor on the outside
of the seat bottom.
Using the Center Tether Anchor
Make sure to attach the tether strap
hook to the anchor before installing
the child seat, because the tether
anchor is positioned behind the child
seat.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Installing a Child Seat
UPPER GUIDE
CENTER TETHER ANCHOR
5. Attach the tether strap hook to the
center tether anchor between the
lower anchors for the LATCHcompatible child seat.
48
6. Properly secure the child seat (see
page 44 ), then tighten the tether
strap according to the seat maker’s
instructions.
Whenever using the tether strap,
make sure to route the strap through
the upper guide before attaching the
tether strap hook to the tether
anchor. If the tether strap is not
routed properly and secured, the
child seat may not be secured. This
could lead to serious injury or death.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Larger Children
When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the
child should sit in a back seat on a
booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder
belt.
Allowing a child age 12 or under
to sit in front can result in injury
or death if the passenger’s front
airbag inflates.
The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
important precautions for a child
who must sit in front.
If a child must ride in front,
move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, use a booster
seat if needed, have the child
sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly.
Checking Seat Belt Fit
Driver and Passenger Safety
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
1. Does the child sit all the way back
against the seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend
comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
CONTINUED
49
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Larger Children
3. Does the shoulder belt cross
between the child’s neck and arm?
Using a Booster Seat
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s
thighs?
If a child who uses a booster seat
must ride in front, move the vehicle
seat as far back as possible and be
sure the child is wearing the seat
belt properly.
5. Will the child be able to stay
seated like this for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these
questions, the child is ready to wear
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If
you answer no to any question, the
child needs to ride on a booster seat.
A child who has outgrown a forwardfacing child seat should ride in a
back seat and use a booster seat
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them
properly without the booster.
Some states and Canadian provinces
also require children to use a booster
seat until they reach a given age or
weight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Be
sure to check current laws in the
states or provinces where you intend
to drive.
50
Booster seats can be high-back or
low-back. Whichever style you select,
make sure the booster seat meets
federal safety standards (see page
39 ) and that you follow the booster
seat maker’s instructions.
A child may continue using a booster
seat until the tops of their ears are
even with the top of the vehicle’s or
booster’s seat-back. A child of this
height should be tall enough to use
the lap/shoulder belt without a
booster seat.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Larger Children
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates in a moderate to severe
frontal collision, the airbag can cause
serious injuries to a child who is
unrestrained, improperly restrained,
sitting too close to the airbag, or out
of position.
Of course, children vary widely. And
while age may be one indicator of
when a child can safely ride in front,
there are other important factors you
should consider.
Physical Size
Physically, a child must be large
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
properly fit (see pages 14 and 49 ). If
the seat belt does not fit properly,
with or without the child sitting on a
booster seat, the child should not sit
in front.
Maturity
A side airbag also poses risks. If any
part of a larger child’s body is in the
path of a deploying side airbag, the
child could receive possibly serious
injuries.
To safely ride in front, a child must
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly, and wearing the seat
belt properly throughout a ride.
If you decide that a child can safely
ride up front, be sure to:
Carefully read the owner’s manual,
and make sure you understand all
seat belt instructions and all safety
information.
Move the vehicle seat to the rearmost position.
Have the child sit up straight, back
against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.
Check that the child’s seat belt is
properly and securely positioned.
Supervise the child. Even a mature
child sometimes needs to be
reminded to fasten the seat belt or
sit properly.
51
Driver and Passenger Safety
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
age 12 and under be properly
restrained in the back seat.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Larger Children
Additional Safety Precautions
Do not let a child wear a seat belt
across the neck. This could result
in serious neck injuries during a
crash.
Do not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back
or under the arm. This could
cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
chance that the child will slide
under the belt in a crash and be
injured.
Two children should never use the
same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
52
Do not put any accessories on a
seat belt. Devices intended to
improve a child’s comfort or
reposition the shoulder part of a
seat belt can make the belt less
effective and increase the chance
of serious injury in a crash.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Have the exhaust system inspected
for leaks whenever:
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause
unconsciousness and even kill
you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or
activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide.
The vehicle is raised for an oil
change.
You notice a change in the sound
of the exhaust.
The vehicle was in an accident
that may have damaged the
underside.
High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas,
such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed.
Even with the door open, run the
engine only long enough to move the
vehicle out of the garage.
With a truck cap installed and the
back window open, engine exhaust
may enter the vehicle and cause a
hazardous condition. Keep the back
window tightly closed whenever you
drive with a truck cap installed.
If you must sit in your parked vehicle
with the engine running, even in an
unconfined area, adjust the heating
and cooling system/climate control
system as follows:
1. Select the fresh air mode.
mode.
2. Select the
3. Turn the fan on high speed.
4. Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.
53
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains
carbon monoxide gas. Carbon
monoxide should not enter the
vehicle in normal driving if you
maintain your vehicle properly and
follow the information on this page.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Safety Labels
These labels are in the locations
shown. They warn you of potential
hazards that could cause serious
injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.
DASHBOARD
SUN VISORS
U.S. models only
U.S. models
If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label which may be
removed by the owner), contact your
dealer for a replacement.
Canadian models
RADIATOR CAP
SUN VISOR
U.S. models only
54
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Safety Labels
HOOD
DOORJAMBS
U.S. models
U.S. models
Canadian models
Driver and Passenger Safety
Canadian models
PICKUP BED
U.S. models
Canadian models
55
Main Menu
Main Menu
Instruments and Controls
This section gives information about
the controls and displays that
contribute to the daily operation of
your vehicle. All the essential
controls are within easy reach.
Interior Convenience Items .......... 112
Center Console .......................... 113
Console Compartments ........ 113
Cargo Hooks .......................... 114
Beverage Holders ...................... 114
Glove Box ................................... 115
Coat Hooks ................................. 115
Sunglasses Holder ..................... 115
Accessory Power Sockets......... 116
Sun Visor .................................... 117
Vanity Mirror ............................. 117
Interior Lights ................................ 118
Bed Lights ...................................... 120
57
Instruments and Controls
Control Locations ............................ 58
Instrument Panel ............................. 59
Instrument Panel Indicators ........... 61
Gauges .............................................. 70
Controls Near the Steering
Wheel ............................................ 74
Multi-Control Lever ......................... 75
Headlight Control Dial .................... 76
Instrument Panel Brightness ......... 78
Hazard Warning Button .................. 79
Steering Wheel Adjustment ........... 79
Keys ................................................... 80
Immobilizer System......................... 81
Ignition Switch ................................. 82
Door Locks ....................................... 83
Remote Transmitter ........................ 89
Dual-Action Tailgate........................ 92
In-Bed Trunk TM ................................ 95
Seats .................................................. 98
Seat Heaters ................................... 104
Power Windows ............................. 105
Moonroof ........................................ 108
Parking Brake ................................ 109
Mirrors ............................................ 110
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Control Locations
INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS (P.59)
GAUGES (P.70)
REAR VIEW MIRROR WITH
COMPASS* (P.168)
AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.133)
AUXILIARY INPUT
JACK* (P.161)
PARKING BRAKE
RELEASE HANDLE
(P.109)
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS (P.122)
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM (P.128)
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P.111)
GLOVE BOX
(P.115)
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
(P.83)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.105)
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
(P.181)
FUEL FILL DOOR
PARKING BRAKE
RELEASE HANDLE (P.179) PEDAL (P.109)
Vehicle with navigation system is shown.
* If equipped
58
CENTER CONSOLE
(P.113)
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS
(P.116)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Instrument Panel
U.S. models
VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR (P.67)
VTM-4 INDICATOR (P.66)
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR (P.65)
LOW TIRE PRESSURE
INDICATOR (P.68)
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P.66)
MAINTENANCE MINDER
INDICATOR (P.67)
SIDE AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR (P.62)
Instruments and Controls
A/T TEMPERATURE INDICATOR (P.66)
VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.67)
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.63)
WASHER LEVEL
INDICATOR (P.65)
TPMS INDICATOR (P.68)
IN-BED TRUNK OPEN
INDICATOR (P.69)
SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT
SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.62)
CHARGING SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.62)
PARKING BRAKE AND
BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.63)
LOW OIL PRESSURE
INDICATOR (P.62)
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR
LAMP (P.62)
BED LIGHTS ON INDICATOR
(P.69)
DOOR AND TAILGATE
OPEN MONITOR (P.64)
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR
(P.68)
BACK WINDOW OPEN
INDICATOR (P.69)
SEAT BELT
REMINDER
INDICATOR
(P.61)
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
(P.65)
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR
(P.65)
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.63)
59
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Instrument Panel
Canadian models
VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR (P.67)
VTM-4 INDICATOR (P.66)
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR (P.65)
A/T TEMPERATURE INDICATOR (P.66)
DAY TIME RUNNING LIGHTS
INDICATOR (P.65)
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P.66)
VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.67)
LOW TIRE PRESSURE
INDICATOR (P.68)
MAINTENANCE MINDER
INDICATOR (P.67)
SIDE AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR (P.62)
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.63)
WASHER LEVEL
INDICATOR (P.65)
TPMS INDICATOR
(P.68)
SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT
SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.62)
IN-BED TRUNK OPEN
INDICATOR (P.69)
CHARGING SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.62)
PARKING BRAKE AND
BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.63)
LOW OIL PRESSURE
INDICATOR (P.62)
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR
LAMP (P.62)
BED LIGHTS ON INDICATOR
(P.69)
60
DOOR AND TAILGATE
OPEN MONITOR (P.64)
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR
(P.68)
BACK WINDOW OPEN
INDICATOR (P.69)
SEAT BELT
REMINDER
INDICATOR
(P.61)
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
(P.65)
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR
(P.65)
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.63)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Instrument Panel Indicators
The instrument panel has many
indicators to give you important
information about your vehicle.
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position before fastening
your seat belts, the beeper sounds,
and the indicator flashes. If you do
not fasten your seat belts before the
beeper stops, the indicator stops
flashing but remains on.
If your front passenger does not
fasten their seat belt, the indicator
comes on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
If either of you do not fasten your
seat belt while driving, the beeper
will sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals. For more
information, see page 18 .
61
Instruments and Controls
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. It reminds you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
A beeper also sounds if you have not
fastened your seat belt.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Instrument Panel Indicators
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
If this indicator comes on while
driving, it means one of the engine’s
emissions control systems may have
a problem. For more information, see
page 289.
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
The engine can be severely damaged
if this indicator flashes or stays on
when the engine is running. For
more information, see page 288 .
Charging System
Indicator
If this indicator comes on when the
engine is running, the battery is not
being charged. For more information,
see page 288 .
62
Supplemental Restraint
System Indicator
This indicator comes on for several
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. If it
comes on at any other time, it
indicates a potential problem with
your front airbags. This indicator will
also alert you to a potential problem
with your side airbags, passenger’s
side airbag automatic cutoff system,
side curtain airbags, automatic seat
belt tensioners, driver’s seat position
sensor, and the front passenger’s
weight sensors. For more
information, see page 28 .
U.S.
Canada
Side Airbag Off
Indicator
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. If it comes on at any
other time, it indicates that the
passenger’s side airbag has
automatically shut off. For more
information, see page 29 .
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Instrument Panel Indicators
U.S.
Canada
1. It comes on when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. It is a reminder to check
the parking brake. A beeper
sounds if you drive with the
parking brake not fully released.
Driving with the parking brake not
fully released can damage the
brakes and tires.
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, and when the ignition
switch is turned to the START (III)
position. If it comes on at any other
time, there is a problem with the
ABS. If this happens, have your
vehicle checked at a dealer. With the
indicator on, your vehicle still has
normal braking ability but no antilock brakes. For more information,
see page 208 .
Immobilizer System
Indicator
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. It will
go off if you have inserted a
properly-coded ignition key. If it is
not a properly-coded key, the
indicator will blink and the engine
will not start (see page 81 ).
This indicator also blinks several
times when you turn the ignition
switch from the ON (II) position to
the ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
position.
2. If it stays on after you have fully
released the parking brake while
the engine is running, or if it
comes on while driving, there
could be a problem with the brake
system. For more information, see
page 290 .
63
Instruments and Controls
Parking Brake
and Brake
System
Indicator
This indicator has two functions:
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Instrument Panel Indicators
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
The left or right turn signal indicator
blinks when you signal a lane change
or turn. If an indicator does not blink
or blinks rapidly, it usually means
one of the turn signal bulbs is
burned out (see pages 256 and 257 ).
Replace the bulb as soon as possible,
since other drivers cannot see that
you are signaling.
When you press the hazard warning
button, both turn signal indicators
and all turn signals on the outside of
the vehicle flash.
Door and Tailgate Open Monitor
This monitor includes two functions;
the door open indicator and the
tailgate open indicator. This monitor
works with the ignition switch in any
position.
The specific door indicator comes on
in this monitor if any door is not
closed tightly.
The tailgate indicator comes on
when the tailgate is swung open or if
it is not closed completely after you
swing it closed.
64
If the tailgate is swung open or is not
closed tightly, you will hear six beeps
and see the indicator blinking when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. The beeper also
sounds and the indicator blinks when
you move the shift lever out of the
Park or neutral position.
The tailgate open indicator does not
monitor the tailgate when it is
dropped open.
If the driver does not fasten the seat
belt and the tailgate is swung open,
the seat belt reminder alarm will
sound at first, then the tailgate open
reminder beeper will sound.
For more information on the tailgate,
see page 94 .
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Instrument Panel Indicators
‘‘Daytime Running
Lights’’ Indicator
Canadian models only
Cruise Control Indicator
This indicator comes on when you
set the cruise control. See page
165 for information on operating the
cruise control.
NOTE:
The main switch can be left on, even
when the system is not in use.
Low Fuel Indicator
This indicator comes on with the
high beam headlights. For more
information, see page 76 .
On Canadian models, this indicator
comes on with reduced brightness
when the daytime running lights
(DRL) are on (see page 78 ).
Washer Level Indicator
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
This indicator comes on when the
washer fluid level is low. Add washer
fluid when you see this indicator
(see page 250 ).
This indicator is located in the fuel
gauge. It comes on as a reminder
that you must refuel soon.
When the indicator comes on, there
is about 3.30 U.S. gal (12.5 ) of fuel
remaining in the tank before the
needle reaches E. There is a small
reserve of fuel remaining in the tank
when the needle does reach E.
65
Instruments and Controls
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position with the headlight
switch off and the parking brake set.
It should go off when you turn on the
headlights or release the parking
brake. If it comes on at any other
time, it means there is a problem
with the DRL. There may also be a
problem with the high beam
headlights.
High Beam Indicator
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Instrument Panel Indicators
Lights On Indicator
This indicator reminds you that the
exterior lights are on. It comes on
when you turn the headlight control
dial to either the
or
position.
If you turn the ignition switch to
ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
without turning off the headlight
control dial, this indicator remains on.
A reminder chime will also sound
when you open the driver’s door.
A/T Temperature
Indicator
This indicator monitors the
temperature of the automatic
transmission fluid. It should come on
for a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it comes on while driving,
it means the transmission fluid
temperature is too high. Pull to the
side of the road when it is safe, shift
to Park, and let the engine idle until
the indicator goes out.
VTM-4 Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it comes on at any other
time, there is a problem in the 4WD
system. Take the vehicle to your
dealer to have it checked.
If the indicator blinks while driving,
the VTM-4 fluid temperature is too
high. Pull to the side of the road
when it is safe, shift to Park, and let
the engine idle until the indicator
goes out.
Continuing to drive with the A/T
temperature indicator on may cause
serious damage to the transmission.
Continuing to drive with the VTM-4
indicator blinking may cause serious
damage to the system.
66
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Instrument Panel Indicators
If it comes on and stays on at any
other time, or if it does not come on
when you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, there is a
problem with the VSA system. Take
your vehicle to a dealer to have it
checked. Without VSA, your vehicle
still has normal driving ability, but
will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement. See page
210 for more information on the
VSA system.
VSA Activation Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. For more information, see
page 210 .
This indicator has three functions:
1. It comes on as a reminder that you
have turned off the vehicle
stability assist (VSA) system.
Maintenance Minder
Indicator
This indicator reminds you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance. The
maintenance main items and sub
items will be displayed in the
information display. See page 235 for
more information on the
maintenance minder.
This indicator goes off when your
dealer resets it after completing the
required maintenance service.
2. It flashes when VSA is active (see
page 210 ).
3. It comes on along with the VSA
system indicator if there is a
problem with the VSA system.
67
Instruments and Controls
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Instrument Panel Indicators
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it comes on while driving,
it indicates that one or more of your
vehicle’s tires are extremely low on
pressure.
If this happens, pull to the side of the
road when it is safe, check which tire
has lost the pressure on the tire
pressure monitor, and determine the
cause. If it is because of a flat tire,
replace the flat tire with the compact
spare (see page 274 ), and have the
flat tire repaired as soon as possible.
If two or more tires are underinflated,
call a professional towing service
(see page 296 ). Refer to page
204 for more information.
68
Tire Pressure Monitor
This monitor normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. While driving, the
appropriate tire indicator will come
on, along with the low tire pressure
indicator, if a tire is extremely
underinflated or has suddenly lost
pressure. See Low Tire Pressure
Indicator for what to do if this
indicator comes on.
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If this indicator comes on and stays
on at any other time, or if it does not
come on when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position, there
is a problem with the TPMS. With
this indicator on, the low tire
pressure indicator and the tire
pressure monitor will not come on
when a tire loses pressure. Take the
vehicle to your dealer to have the
system checked.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Instrument Panel Indicators
Bed Lights On Indicator
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
position without turning off the bed
lights, this indicator will remain on,
and then go off after 20 minutes. See
page 120 for more information.
Back Window Open
Indicator
This indicator reminds you that the
back window is not completely
closed when you turn the ignition
switch from the ON (II) position to
the ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK
(0) position. With the ignition switch
in the ACCESSORY (I) position, it
goes off after about 30 seconds. With
the ignition switch in the LOCK (0)
position, it goes off after about 3
minutes.
If you remove the ignition key, turn
off the lights, and open the driver’s
door without closing the back
window, you will hear five beeps and
see the indicator blink. If you do not
close the back window before the
beeper stops, the indicator stops
blinking but remains on. It will go off
after about 3 minutes. See page
106 for more information.
69
Instruments and Controls
This indicator reminds you that the
bed lights are on. With the shift lever
in the Park position, they come on
when you push the light switch on
the dashboard, swing open the
tailgate, or open the In-Bed Trunk.
In-Bed Trunk Open
Indicator
This indicator reminds you that the
In-Bed Trunk is open. If you do not
close it, the indicator stays on for
about 3 minutes. See page 95 for
more information.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Gauges
FUEL GAUGE
TACHOMETER
SPEEDOMETER
TEMPERATURE GAUGE
ODOMETER/
TIGHTEN FUEL
CAP MESSAGE
SELECT
BUTTON
To switch the information display
between the odometer, trip meter
and outside temperature (if
equipped), and engine oil life and
maintenance service items, press the
SELECT button repeatedly.
Odometer
This shows the total distance your
vehicle has been driven. It measures
miles in U.S. models and kilometers
in Canadian models.
It is illegal under U.S. federal law and
Canadian provincial regulations to
disconnect, reset, or alter the
odometer with the intent to change
the number of miles or kilometers
indicated.
OUTSIDE
TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR
INFORMATION
DISPLAY
TRIP METER
U.S. model is shown.
70
RESET
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Gauges
Trip Meter
This meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it.
To reset a trip meter, display it, and
then press and hold the RESET
button until the number resets to
‘‘0.0’’. Both trip meters will reset if
the vehicle’s battery goes dead or is
disconnected. And both continue to
track mileage, even when only one is
displayed.
Fuel Gauge
This shows how much fuel you have.
It may show slightly more or less
than the actual amount. The needle
returns to the bottom after you turn
off the ignition.
Avoid driving with an extremely low
f uel level. Running out of f uel could
cause the engine to misf ire, damaging
the catalytic converter.
RESET BUTTON
There are two trip meters: TRIP A
and TRIP B. Switch between these
displays by pressing the SELECT
button repeatedly. Each trip meter
works independently, so you can
keep track of two different distances.
71
Instruments and Controls
SELECT BUTTON
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the meter you
last selected is displayed.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Gauges
Temperature Gauge
This shows the temperature of the
engine’s coolant. During normal
operation, the pointer should rise to
about the middle of the gauge. In
severe driving conditions, the pointer
may rise to the upper zone. If it
reaches the red (hot) mark, pull
safely to the side of the road. For
instructions and precautions on
checking the engine’s cooling
system, see page 286 .
Outside Temperature Indicator
If equipped
This indicator displays the outside
temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.
models) or Centigrade (Canadian
models).
The temperature sensor is in the
front bumper. Therefore, the
temperature reading can be affected
by heat reflection from the road
surface, engine heat, and the
exhaust from surrounding traffic.
This can cause an incorrect
temperature reading when your
speed is under 19 mph (30 km/h).
The sensor delays the indicator
update until it reaches the correct
outside temperature. This may take
several minutes.
If the outside temperature is
incorrectly displayed, you can adjust
it up ±5°F in U.S. models (±3°C in
Canadian models) warmer or cooler.
72
NOTE: The temperature must be
stabilized before doing this
procedure.
To adjust the outside temperature
indicator, make sure the outside
temperature indicator is shown in
the display, then press and hold the
RESET button for 10 seconds (the
TRIP A or B is also reset). The
following sequence will appear for 1
second each: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, −5, −4,
−3, −2, −1, 0 (U.S.) or 0, 1, 2, 3,
−3, −2, −1, 0 (Canada).
When it reaches the desired value,
release the RESET button. You
should see the new outside
temperature displayed.
In certain weather conditions,
temperature readings near freezing
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Gauges
If the system still detects a leak in
your vehicle's evaporative emissions
system, the malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel cap
was not already tightened, turn the
engine off, and check or retighten the
fuel cap until it clicks at least once.
The MIL goes off after several days of
normal driving once the cap is
tightened or replaced. If the MIL does
not go off, have your vehicle inspected
by a dealer. For more information, see
page 289.
Maintenance Minder Display
The information display in the
instrument panel shows you the
engine oil life and maintenance
service items when the ignition
switch is in the ON (II) position. This
information helps to keep you aware
of the periodic maintenance your
vehicle needs for continued troublefree driving. Refer to page 235 for
more information.
73
Instruments and Controls
Tighten Fuel Cap Message
If your fuel fill cap is loose or
missing, a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’
message appears on the information
display after you start the engine.
Turn the engine off, and confirm the
fuel cap is installed. If it is, loosen it,
then retighten it until it clicks at least
once. When you restart the engine,
the message appears again. The
message goes off after several days
of normal driving once you tighten
or replace the fuel cap. To scroll to
another message, press the select
button.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
MOONROOF SWITCH*2
(P.108)
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS (P.78)
SHIFT LEVER
(P.197)
VTM-4 LOCK (P.203)
SELECT BUTTON
(P.70)
MULTI-CONTROL LEVER
(WINDSHIELD WIPERS/
WASHERS/TURN SIGNALS/
HEADLIGHT HIGH BEAMS)
(P.75)
RESET BUTTON
(P.70)
PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
(P.29)
BED LIGHT SWITCH
(P.120)
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
(P.79)
HEADLIGHT CONTROL
DIAL (P.76)
VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST (VSA)
SYSTEM OFF SWITCH
(P.211)
CRUISE BUTTON
(P.165)
HORN*1
REMOTE AUDIO
CRUISE
CONTROLS*2 (P.161) STEERING WHEEL
CONTROLS
ADJUSTMENT (P.79) (P.165)
Vehicle with navigation system is shown.
*1 To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘H’’ logo.
*2 If equipped.
74
INTERIOR LIGHT
CONTROL SWITCH
(P.118)
SEAT HEATERS*2
(P.104)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Multi-Control Lever
The multi-control lever has many
functions, including windshield
wipers and washers, turn signals,
headlight high beams, and headlight
high beam flashing.
OFF: The wipers are not activated.
1.OFF
2.INT: Intermittent
3.INT TIME ring
4.LO: Low speed
5.HI: High speed
6.MIST
7.Windshield washer (spray nozzles)
8.Turn signal
9.High beams
10.Flash high beams
INT: The length of the wiper
interval is varied
automatically according to the
vehicle’s speed.
HI − The wipers run at high speed.
MIST: The wipers run at high speed
until you release the lever.
Windshield Washer: Push the
button on the end of the
multi-control lever. The
washers spray until you
release the button. The
wipers run at low speed, then
complete one more sweep
after you release the button.
Vary the delay by turning the
INT TIME ring. If you turn it
to the shortest delay, the
wipers change to low speed
when the vehicle speed
exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
75
Instruments and Controls
To select a position, turn the rotary
switch, push the button on the end of
the lever, or push the lever up, down,
forward, or backward.
LO − The wipers run at low speed.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Multi-Control Lever, Headlights
Automatic Heated Wiper Zone
Your vehicle has heating wires at the
bottom of the windshield to help
heat the wiper blades and the
windshield. If the outside
temperature is near freezing, the
heater turns on automatically when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. The heater turns
off automatically when the outside
temperature is above freezing.
This function helps to increase wiper
performance when the wiper arms
sit in the parked position in snowy or
icy conditions.
76
Turn Signal − Push down on the
multi-control lever to signal a left
turn and up to signal a right turn. To
signal a lane change, push lightly on
the lever and hold it. The lever will
return to center when you release it
or complete a turn.
Headlight Control Dial
High Beams − To turn on the high
beams, push the multi-control lever
forward until you hear a click. The
blue high beam indicator will come
on (see page 65 ). Pull the lever back
to return to the low beams.
To flash the high beams, pull the
lever back lightly, then release it.
The high beams will stay on as long
as you hold the lever back.
1. OFF
2. Parking and indicator lights
3. Headlights
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Headlights
Headlights − Turning the dial to
the ‘‘
’’ position turns on the
parking lights, taillights, instrument
panel lights, and license plate lights.
When the dial is in the ‘‘
’’ or
‘‘
’’ position, the lights on
indicator comes on as a reminder.
This indicator stays on if you leave
the lights on and turn the ignition
switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or
LOCK (0) position.
This feature activates if you leave
the headlight control dial in the
‘‘
’’ or ‘‘
’’ position, remove
the key, then open and close the
driver’s door.
If you remove the key from the
ignition switch with the headlight
control dial on, but do not open the
door, the lights will turn off after 10
minutes.
The lights will turn on again when
you unlock or open the driver’s door.
If you unlock the door, but do not
open it within 15 seconds, the lights
go off. With the driver’s door open,
you will hear a lights-on reminder
chime.
77
Instruments and Controls
Turning the dial to the ‘‘
’’
position turns on the headlights. If
you leave the lights on and remove
the key from the ignition switch, you
will hear a reminder chime when you
open the driver’s door.
Automatic Lighting Off Feature
The automatic lighting off feature
turns off the headlights, all other
exterior lights, and the instrument
panel lights within 15 seconds of
removing the key from the ignition
switch and closing the driver’s door.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Headlights, Instrument Panel Brightness
Daytime Running Lights
Instrument Panel Brightness
Canadian models only
With the headlight control dial off,
the high beam headlights and the
high beam indicator come on with
reduced brightness when you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position and release the parking
brake. They remain on until you turn
the ignition switch off, even if you
set the parking brake.
The headlights revert to normal
operation when you turn them on
with the headlight control dial.
If you insert the key but do not turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, the illumination turns off in
about 10 seconds.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL DIAL
The dial on the instrument panel
controls the brightness of the
instrument panel lights and the
console compartment light. Turn the
dial to adjust the brightness.
The instrument panel will illuminate
with reduced brightness when you
unlock and open the driver’s door.
The brightness will increase and go
to a normal level when you insert the
key in the ignition switch.
78
If you do not insert the key in the
ignition switch after opening the
driver’s door, the illumination turns
off about 30 seconds after you close
the door.
The instrument panel brightness is
dimmed when you turn the headlight
control dial to the ‘‘
’’ or
‘‘
’’ position to reduce glare at
night. To cancel it, turn the
instrument panel brightness control
dial upward fully until you hear a
click.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Hazard Warning Button, Steering Wheel Adjustment
Hazard Warning Button
Steering Wheel Adjustment
Make any steering wheel adjustment
before you start driving.
Instruments and Controls
Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only
when the vehicle is stopped.
Push the button to turn on the
hazard warning lights (four-way
flashers). This causes all four
outside turn signals and both turn
indicators in the instrument panel to
flash. Use the hazard warning lights
if you need to park in a dangerous
area near heavy traffic, or if your
vehicle is disabled.
1. Push the lever on the left side of
the steering column all the way
down.
3. Push the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in position.
4. Make sure you have securely
locked the steering wheel in place
by trying to move it up and down.
2. Move the steering wheel so it
points toward your chest, not
toward your face. Make sure you
can see the instrument panel
gauges and indicators.
79
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Keys
MASTER KEY VALET KEY
KEY
NUMBER WITH REMOTE (LIGHT GRAY)
TRANSMITTER
TAG
You should have received a key
number tag with your keys. You will
need this key number if you ever
have to get a lost key replaced. Use
only Honda-approved key blanks.
These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
immobilizer system. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.
Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Do not drop the keys or set heavy
objects on them.
The master key fits all the locks on
your vehicle. The valet key works
only in the ignition and the driver’s
door lock. You can keep the glove
box locked when you leave your
vehicle and the valet key at a parking
facility.
You can also keep the In-Bed Trunk
locked by using the main switch in
the glove box (see page 97 ).
80
Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them
immediately with a soft cloth.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Immobilizer System
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e. key
fob) is near the ignition switch when
you insert the key.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer
system indicator should come on for
a few seconds, then go off. If the
indicator starts to blink, it means the
system does not recognize the
coding of the key. Turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK (0) position,
remove the key, reinsert it, and turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position again.
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of your key,
contact your dealer.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle undrivable.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
If you have lost your key and cannot
start the engine, contact your dealer.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
81
Instruments and Controls
The immobilizer system protects
your vehicle from theft. If an
improperly-coded key (or other
device) is used, the engine’s fuel
system is disabled.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Ignition Switch
LOCK (0) − You can insert or
remove the key only in this position.
To turn the key, the shift lever must
be in Park, and you must push the
key in slightly.
If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may make it difficult
to turn the key. Firmly turn the
steering wheel to the left or right as
you turn the key.
The ignition switch has four
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY
(I), ON (II), and START (III).
ACCESSORY (I) − You can
operate the audio system and the
accessory power sockets in this
position.
ON (II) − This is the normal key
position when driving. Several of the
indicators on the instrument panel
come on as a test when you turn the
ignition switch from the
ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)
position.
82
START (III) − Use this position
only to start the engine. The switch
returns to the ON (II) position when
you let go of the key.
You will hear a reminder beeper if
you leave the key in the ignition
switch in the LOCK (0) or the
ACCESSORY (I) position and open
the driver’s door. Remove the key to
turn off the beeper.
The shift lever must be in Park (P)
before you can remove the key from
the ignition switch.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Door Locks
Power Door Locks
LOCK TAB
You can open or close the side
windows by using the key in the
driver’s door (see page 107 ).
MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
To lock all doors and the In-Bed
Trunk (the tailgate does not lock),
push the front of the master door lock
switch on either front door, press the
lock tab down on the driver’s door, or
use the key on the outside lock on the
driver’s door.
Pushing the rear of either master
door lock switch will unlock all of the
doors and the In-Bed Trunk.
To lock any passenger’s door when
getting out of the vehicle, push the
lock tab down, and close the door.
To lock the driver’s door, remove the
key from the ignition switch, and
push the lock tab down, or push the
front of the master switch, then
close the door.
Lockout Prevention
With the driver’s door open and the
key in the ignition, both master door
lock switches will not lock, but they
will unlock. The lock feature is not
disabled if the driver’s door is closed.
Pushing the front of the switch on the
open passenger’s door will lock all
doors and the In-Bed Trunk.
This vehicle has auto door locking/
unlocking features. See page 84 for
how to set them.
83
Instruments and Controls
The lock tab on each door locks and
unlocks that door. Pulling up on the
driver’s door lock tab only unlocks
the driver’s door. To unlock the
driver’s door and the In-Bed Trunk
from the outside, turn the key and
release it. If you turn it again, all the
doors unlock.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Door Locks
Childproof Door Locks
LOCK LEVER
The childproof door locks are
designed to prevent children seated
in the rear from accidentally opening
the rear doors. Each rear door has a
lock lever near the edge. With the
lever in the LOCK position, the door
cannot be opened from inside
regardless of the position of the lock
tab. To open the door, pull the lock
tab up, and use the outside door
handle.
84
Automatic (Auto) Door Locking/
Unlocking
Your vehicle has customizable
settings for the doors to
automatically lock and unlock. Make
all settings before you start driving.
To program the Park Lock
mode:
Locks all doors when the shift lever is
moved out of Park (P).
With the auto door locking and
unlocking, the In-Bed Trunk also
locks and unlocks (the tailgate does
not lock).
Auto Door Locking
The auto door locking feature has
three possible settings:
The doors lock whenever you
move the shift lever out of the
Park (P) position.
The doors lock when the vehicle
speed reaches 9 mph (15 km/h).
The auto door locking is
deactivated all the time.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
2. Apply the parking brake, and close
the driver’s door.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position (do not start the
engine).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Door Locks
To program the Drive Lock mode:
Locks all doors when the vehicle’s speed
reaches about 9 mph (15 km/h).
4. Push and hold the brake pedal,
then move the shift lever out of
Park (P).
5. Push and hold the front of the
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a
clicking sound, and after about 5
seconds, you will hear another
clicking sound.
5. Release the switch, and turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) position within 5 seconds.
6. Release the switch, and turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) position within 5 seconds.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
7. Move the shift lever to PARK (P).
2. Apply the parking brake, and close
the driver’s door.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position (do not start the
engine).
CONTINUED
85
Instruments and Controls
4. Push and hold the front of the
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a
clicking sound, and after about 5
seconds, you will hear another
clicking sound.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Door Locks
To turn off the Auto Lock modes:
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
2. Apply the parking brake, and open
the driver’s door.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position (do not start the
engine).
86
4. Push and hold the front of the
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a
clicking sound after about 5
seconds.
Auto Door Unlocking
The auto door unlocking feature has
three modes (Park Unlock, Ignition
Switch, and Deactivated), with five
possible settings:
5. Release the switch, and turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) position within 5 seconds.
Park Unlock mode:
The driver’s door and then In-Bed
Trunk unlocks whenever you move
the shift lever to the PARK (P)
position.
All doors and the In-Bed trunk
unlocks whenever you move the
shift lever to the PARK (P) position.
Ignition Switch mode:
The driver’s door and the In-Bed
Trunk unlocks whenever you turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position.
All doors and the In-Bed Trunk unlocks
whenever you turn the ignition switch to
theLOCK (0) position.
Deactivated:
The auto door unlocking settings
are deactivated.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Door Locks
To program the Park Unlock mode:
Unlock mode:
Unlocks driver’s door or all doors when
the shift lever is moved to Park (P).
3. Push and hold the rear of the
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a
clicking sound. Continue to hold
down the switch:
To program the Ignition Sw itch
Unlock mode:
Unlocks driver’s door or all doors when
the ignition switch is out of the ON (II)
position.*
Instruments and Controls
−Until you hear a second click
(after about 5 seconds) to
activate the driver’s door unlock
feature.
−Or, until you hear a third click
(after about 10 seconds) to
activate the all door unlock
feature.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in
Park (P), and close the driver’s
door.
4. Release the switch, and turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) position within 5 seconds.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
2. Apply the parking brake, and close
the driver’s door.
* If equipped
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position (do not start the engine).
CONTINUED
87
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Door Locks
4. Push and hold the brake pedal,
then move the shift lever out of
Park (P).
To turn off the door unlock
modes:
5. Push and hold the rear of the
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a
clicking sound. Continue to hold
down the switch:
5. Release the switch, and turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) position within 5 seconds.
−Until you hear a second click
(after about 5 seconds) to
activate the driver’s door unlock
feature.
−Or, until you hear a third click
(after about 10 seconds) to
activate the all door unlock
feature.
6. Release the switch, and turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) position within 5 seconds.
7. Move the shift lever to PARK (P).
88
4. Push and hold the rear of the
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a
clicking sound, and after about 5
seconds, you will hear another
clicking sound.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
2. Apply the parking brake, and
open the driver’s door.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position (do not start the
engine).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remote Transmitter
LED
PANIC
BUTTON
LOCK − Press this button once to
lock all doors and the In-Bed Trunk.
Some exterior and interior lights will
flash once.
When you push LOCK twice within 5
seconds, you will hear a horn to
verify that the doors and In-Bed
Trunk are locked and the security
system (if equipped) has set. This
button does not work if any door is
not fully closed or the key is in the
ignition switch.
UNLOCK − Press this button once
to unlock the driver’s door and the
In-Bed Trunk. Push it twice to unlock
the remaining doors. If you press the
button twice and hold for 3–5 seconds,
the side windows will roll down (see
page 107).
Some exterior and interior lights will
flash twice each time you push the
button.
If you do not open any door within 30
seconds, the doors automatically
relock, and the security system sets
(if equipped). The UNLOCK button
does not work when the key is in the
ignition switch.
When you press the UNLOCK
button, the front and rear individual
map lights, depending on the interior
light control switch position, will
come on (see page 118 ). If you do
not open any door, the lights stay on
for about 30 seconds, then go out. If
you relock the doors and the In-Bed
Trunk with the remote transmitter
before 30 seconds have elapsed, the
lights will go off immediately.
PANIC − Press and hold this
button for about 1 second to attract
attention; the horn will sound and
the exterior lights will flash for about
30 seconds. To cancel panic mode,
press any other button on the remote
transmitter, or turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. Panic
mode does not work when the key is
in the ignition switch.
You can also open all side windows
from outside the vehicle with the
remote transmitter (see page 107 ).
89
Instruments and Controls
UNLOCK
BUTTON
LOCK
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remote Transmitter
Remote Transmitter Care
Avoid dropping or throwing the
transmitter.
Replacing the Transmitter
Battery
Protect the transmitter from
extreme temperature.
BATTERY
Do not immerse the transmitter in
any liquid.
If you lose a transmitter, the
replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer.
SCREW
If it takes several pushes on the
button to lock or unlock the doors,
replace the battery as soon as
possible.
Battery type: CR1616
To replace the battery:
1. Remove the screw at the base of
the transmitter with a small
Phillips-head screwdriver.
90
2. Separate the transmitter by prying
its middle seam with your
fingernail.
3. Inside the transmitter, separate
the inner cover from the keypad
by releasing the two tabs on the
cover.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remote Transmitter
4. Remove the old battery from the
back of the inner cover, and insert
a new battery into the back of the
cover with the + side facing down.
Instruments and Controls
5. Install the parts in reverse order.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
91
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Dual-Action Tailgate
You can open the tailgate two
different ways:
Drop it open by using the upper
handle.
Swing it open by using the right
lower handle.
NOTE:
As a safety feature, the upper handle
is disabled if you do not fully close
the tailgate after it is swung open.
And the lower handle is disabled if
you do not fully close the tailgate
after it is dropped open.
92
Before you open the tailgate a
different way (dropped open, and
then swung open), make sure it is
fully closed.
To Drop Open the Tailgate
UPPER HANDLE
Make sure all passengers and
objects are clear of the tailgate
before opening and closing it, and
make sure the tailgate is closed
securely before driving.
To drop open the tailgate, pull up the
upper handle, then pull down the
tailgate. To close the tailgate, push
firmly up until it latches.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Dual-Action Tailgate
To turn the bed lights on or off, use
the bed light switch on the
dashboard (see page 120 ).
To Swing Open the Tailgate
Do not drive with the tailgate swung
open. This could damage the tailgate.
HANDLE
Instruments and Controls
The dropped open tailgate can be
used as an extended pickup bed.
Make sure to secure the items in the
pickup bed, and do not exceed the
maximum allowable weight on the
tailgate (see page 189 ).
Swinging the tailgate open or
closed while anyone is in its
path can cause serious injury.
Make sure all passengers are
clear of the tailgate’s path
before opening or closing it.
To swing open the tailgate, first
make sure it is fully closed, then pull
up the right lower handle, and swing
the tailgate to the left.
To close, swing the tailgate back,
and push it firmly until it is latched.
Before opening or closing the
tailgate, check that passengers,
especially children, are not in the
tailgate’s path.
CONTINUED
93
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Dual-Action Tailgate
Do not allow anyone to hang on the
swung open tailgate. This could
damage the tailgate.
Do not leave the tailgate swung open.
The tailgate may swing and shut
accidentally. This could cause
serious injuries.
The bed lights come on when you
swing open the tailgate. You can also
turn the bed lights on or off by
pushing the bed light switch on the
dashboard (see page 120 ).
94
Tailgate Open Indicator
This indicator is in the door and
tailgate open monitor on the
instrument panel. It comes on when
the tailgate is swung open or it is not
completely closed. This indicator
works even if the key is not in the
ignition switch.
If the tailgate is swung open or not
closed tightly when the ignition
switch is in the ON (II) position, you
will hear six beeps and see the
indicator blinking. The indicator
stays on until you close the tailgate.
The beeper also sounds and the
indicator blinks when you move the
shift lever out of the Park or neutral
position.
If you do not fasten the seat belt, you
first hear the seat belt reminder
alarm, then the tailgate reminder
beeper sounds.
The indicator does not monitor the
tailgate when it is dropped open.
Loading Cargo
See page 186 for information on
cargo loading and weight limits.
You can also store and lock items in
the In-Bed Trunk (see page 95 ).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
In-Bed TrunkTM
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, the
release button on the In-Bed Trunk
lid is disabled. To open the In-Bed
Trunk, use the master key.
RELEASE
BUTTON
You can open the In-Bed Trunk two
different ways:
Push the release button on the
lower right side of the In-Bed
Trunk lid when the driver’s door is
unlocked.
Use the master key to open the
In-Bed Trunk when the driver’s
door is locked.
To close the In-Bed Trunk, lower the
lid, then press down on the back
edge.
When the In-Bed Trunk is closed
securely, it can be locked or
unlocked along with the power door
locks (see page 83 ).
You can store items in the In-Bed
Trunk up to 300 lbs (136 kg). Do not
exceed this weight limit, or you may
damage the In-Bed Trunk. See page
186 for information on loading cargo
and weight limits.
To store items separately in the
In-Bed Trunk, optional divider
guides are available from your dealer.
CONTINUED
95
Instruments and Controls
The bed lights come on when you
open the In-Bed Trunk. You can also
turn the bed lights on or off by
pushing the bed light switch on the
dashboard (see page 120 ).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
In-Bed TrunkTM
To avoid damaging the key and key
cylinder of the In-Bed Trunk lid, do
not close the tailgate when the key is
in the lid.
To avoid damaging the seal on the
In-Bed Trunk lid, remove any debris
from the lid’s mating surface before
you close it.
Emergency Opener
To avoid damaging the In-Bed Trunk
lid, and to prevent items from being
thrown about the vehicle and
possibly hurting someone in an
accident or sudden stop, be sure the
In-Bed Trunk lid is securely closed
before driving away.
To avoid damaging the bottom of the
In-Bed Trunk, do not drive over large
obstacles, and do not use it as a
jacking point to raise the vehicle.
In-Bed Trunk Open
Indicator
This indicator on the instrument
panel reminds you that the In-Bed
Trunk is open (see page 69 ).
96
As a safety feature, your vehicle has
a release lever on the latch of the
In-Bed Trunk lid so it can be opened
from the inside. To open the In-Bed
Trunk, push the release lever in the
direction of the arrow.
Parents should decide if their
children should be shown how to use
this feature. For more information
about child safety, see page 36 .
Main Menu
Table of Contents
In-Bed TrunkTM
In-Bed Trunk Main Switch
Washing the In-Bed Trunk
MAIN SWITCH
Cargo Hooks
CARGO HOOKS
To protect items in the In-Bed Trunk,
you can disable its release button by
turning off the main switch in the
glove box and locking the glove box
with the master key.
Even if the main switch is in the OFF
position, you can open the In-Bed
Trunk with the master key.
You can wash the inside of the
In-Bed Trunk with a water and mild
detergent solution, and a soft brush
or cloth.
There are two cargo hooks for
plastic grocery bags at the back of
the In-Bed Trunk. They are designed
to hold light items. Heavy objects
may damage the hooks.
To drain water from the In-Bed
Trunk, remove the drain plug by
turning it counterclockwise.
When you are finished washing the
In-Bed Trunk, dry it with a soft cloth,
and reinstall the drain plug.
97
Instruments and Controls
DRAIN PLUG
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Seats
The front passenger’s seat in all
models adjusts manually.
Manual Seat Adjustments
to make sure it is locked in position.
On RT, RTX, and Canadian LX models
See pages 11 − 13 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seatbacks.
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
To change the seat-back angle of the
front seat, pull up the lever on the
outside of the seat bottom.
Once your seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure it
is locked in position.
To adjust the seat forward or
backward, pull up on the bar under
the seat cushion’s front edge. Move
the seat to the desired position, and
release the bar. Try to move the seat
98
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Seats
Driver’s Seat Manual Height
Adjustment
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
Make sure to pull the lever upward
or downward to its full range.
Driver’s Manual Lumbar Support
Instruments and Controls
On RTS model
On RT, RTX, and Canadian LX models
The height of your driver’s seat is
adjustable. To raise the seat,
repeatedly pull up the lever on the
outside of the seat cushion. To lower
the seat, push the lever down
repeatedly.
Vary the lumbar support by moving
the lever on the right side of the
seat-back. Move the lever forward or
backward to adjust the lumbar
support through its full range.
99
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Seats
Moves the whole seat up
and forward, or down
and backward. The front
of the seat also tilts up or
down at the same time.
Power Seat Adjustments
On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXL
models
See pages 11 − 13 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seatbacks.
The controls for the power
adjustable driver’s seat are on the
outside edge of the seat bottom. You
can adjust the seat with the ignition
switch in any position. Make all seat
adjustments before you start driving.
Moving the long horizontal switch
adjusts the seat bottom in several
directions. The seat bottom adjusts
in the direction you move the switch.
The short vertical switch adjusts the
seat-back angle.
Adjusts the seat-back
angle forward or
backward.
Moves the seat forward
and backward.
Moves the front of the
seat up or down.
Raises or lowers the seat.
100
Increases or decreases
the lumbar support.
(RTL and Canadian EXL
models)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Seats
Armrests
FRONT
Instruments and Controls
To use the console lid as an armrest,
slide it to the desired position.
REAR
The rear seat armrest is in the
center of the rear seats. Pivot it
down to use it.
Make sure your passenger’s hands
or fingers are away from the armrest
before moving it.
101
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Seats
Head Restraints
Rear Center Position
See page 13 for important safety
information and a warning about how to
properly position the head restraints.
Your vehicle is equipped with head
restraints in all seating positions to
help protect you and your
passengers from whiplash and other
injuries.
They are most effective when you
adjust them so the back of the
occupant’s head rests against the
center of the restraint.
102
RELEASE BUTTON
The head restraints adjust for height.
You need both hands to adjust the
restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it
while driving. To raise it, pull upward.
To lower the restraint, push the
release button sideways, and push
the restraint down.
RELEASE BUTTON
When a passenger is seated in the
rear center seating position, make
sure the center head restraint is
properly positioned.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Seats
Folding the Rear Seats
The left and right rear seat cushions
can be lifted up separately to make
room for cargo.
LEGS
FLOOR GUIDE
To fold a rear seat cushion, pull up
the lever on the outside of the
cushion. The seat cushion pops up,
and the seat legs store underneath it.
Push the cushion firmly against the
seat-back to lock it in place.
To return the seat cushion to its
original position, pull the lever
outward, then push down the seat
cushion slowly.
Make sure the seat cushion is locked
securely and the seat legs are
positioned properly in the floor guide.
CONTINUED
103
Instruments and Controls
Remove any items from the seat
before you fold up the seat cushion.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Seats, Seat Heaters
Make sure all items in the cargo area
are secured. Loose items can fly
forward and cause injury if you have
to brake hard (See Carrying Cargo
on page 186 ).
Seat Heaters
SEAT HEATER SWITCHES
In LO, the heater runs continuously.
It does not cycle with temperature
changes.
You can also store small items under
the rear seats. Make sure to secure
the items so they will not shift while
you are driving.
Follow these precautions when using
the seat heaters:
If equipped
Both front seats have seat heaters.
The passenger seat is only heated in
the seat bottom because of the side
airbag cutoff system. The ignition
switch must be in the ON (II)
position to use seat heaters. Push the
top of the switch, HI, to rapidly heat
up the seat. After the seat reaches a
comfortable temperature, select LO
by pushing the bottom of the switch.
This will keep the seat warm.
104
In HI, the heater turns off when the
seat gets warm, and turns back on
after the seat’s temperature drops.
Use the HI setting only to heat the
seats quickly, because it draws
large amounts of current from the
battery.
If the engine is left idling for an
extended period, do not use the
seat heaters, even on the LO
setting. It can weaken the battery,
causing hard starting.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Power Windows
DRIVER’S WINDOW
SWITCH
MAIN SWITCH
The windows operate for up to 10
minutes after you turn off the
ignition switch. Opening either front
door cancels this function.
Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position to raise or lower any
side window, or open and close the
back window. To open the window,
push the switch down and hold it.
Release the switch when you want
the window to stop. Pull back on the
switch and hold it to close the
window.
Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.
When you push the MAIN switch in,
the passenger windows and the back
window cannot be raised or lowered.
To cancel this feature, push on the
switch again. Keep the MAIN switch
off when you have children in the
vehicle so they do not injure
themselves by operating the
windows unintentionally.
CONTINUED
105
Instruments and Controls
BACK WINDOW
SWITCH
AUTO − To open or close the
driver’s window, push or pull the
window switch firmly down or up to
the second detent, and release it.
The window will automatically go up
or down all the way. To stop the
window, pull or push the window
switch briefly.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Power Windows
AUTO REVERSE − If the driver’s
window senses any obstacle while it
is closing automatically, it will
reverse direction, and then stop. To
close the window, remove the
obstacle, then use the window switch
again.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
window is almost closed. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the window
before closing it.
If the driver’s window fuse is
removed, the AUTO function may be
disabled. The power window system
needs to be reset after reinstalling
the fuse.
1. Start the engine. Push down and
hold the driver’s window switch
until the window is fully open.
2. Pull and hold the driver’s window
switch to close the window
completely, then hold the switch
for about 2 seconds.
If the power windows do not operate
properly after resetting, have your
vehicle checked by your dealer.
106
Back Window
Your vehicle has a power back
window.
Back Window Open
Indicator
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch from the ON
(II) to the ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK
(0) position without closing the back
window. With the ignition switch in
the ACCESSORY (I) position, the
indicator goes off after about 30
seconds. With the ignition switch in
the LOCK (0) position, the indicator
goes off after about 3 minutes.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Power Windows
The back window is not designed to
carry long items through it. Do not
use the opened back window as a
cargo area pass-through.
Opening the Side Windows with
the Remote Transmitter
You can open all of the side windows
from the outside with the remote
transmitter.
UNLOCK BUTTON
1. Press the UNLOCK button once
to unlock the driver’s door.
Close
2. Press the UNLOCK button a
second time, and hold it. The
passenger’s doors unlock, and all
four side windows start to open.
To stop the windows, release the
button.
3. To open the windows further,
press the button again, within
about 3 seconds.
You cannot close the windows with
the remote transmitter.
Open
Opening/Closing the Side
Windows with the Key
You can open and close the side
windows with the key in the driver’s
door lock.
To open:
1. Insert the key in the driver’s door
lock.
2. Turn the key clockwise, then
release it.
CONTINUED
107
Instruments and Controls
If you remove the ignition key and
open the driver’s door without
closing the back window, you hear
five beeps and see the indicator blink.
If you do not close the back window
before the beeper stops, the
indicator stops blinking but remains
on. It will go off after about 3
minutes (see page 69 ).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Power Windows, Moonroof
3. Turn the key clockwise again, and
hold it. All four side windows start
to open. To stop the windows,
release the key.
4. To open the windows further, turn
and hold the key again (within
10 seconds).
4. To close the windows further, turn
and hold the key again (within
10 seconds).
Moonroof
NOTE: If the windows stop before
the desired position, repeat steps 2
and 3.
NOTE: If the windows stop before
the desired position, repeat steps 2
and 3.
To close:
1. Insert the key in the driver’s door
lock.
2. Turn the key counterclockwise,
then release it.
3. Turn the key counterclockwise
again, and hold it. All four side
windows start to close. To stop the
windows, release the key.
108
MOONROOF SWITCH
If equipped
The moonroof has two positions: it
can be tilted up in the back for
ventilation, or it can slide back into
the roof. Use the switch near the left
dashboard vent to operate the
moonroof. The ignition switch must
be in the ON (II) position.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Moonroof, Parking Brake
Make sure everyone’s hands are
away from the moonroof before
opening or closing it.
Opening or closing the
moonroof on someone’s hands
or fingers can cause serious
injury.
You can open and close the
moonroof for up to 10 minutes after
you turn off the ignition switch.
Opening either front door cancels
this function.
If you try to open the moonroof in
below-f reezing temperatures, or when
it is covered with snow or ice, you can
damage the moonroof panel or its
motor.
Parking Brake
RELEASE
HANDLE
PARKING BRAKE PEDAL
To apply the parking brake, push the
pedal down with your foot. To
release it, pull the release handle
fully. The parking brake indicator on
the instrument panel should go out
when the parking brake is fully
released, and the ignition switch is in
the ON (II) position (see page 63 ).
Make sure all hands and fingers
are clear of the moonroof
before opening or closing it.
CONTINUED
109
Instruments and Controls
To tilt up the back of the moonroof,
press and hold the center part of the
switch (
). To close the
moonroof, press and hold the upper
part of the switch (
). To open
the moonroof, press and hold the
lower part of the switch (
).
Release the switch when the
moonroof gets to the desired
position.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Parking Brake, Mirrors
Mirrors
Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and axles. A beeper will sound
if the vehicle is driven with the parking
brake on.
If equipped
TAB
Keep the inside and outside mirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.
The inside mirror has day and night
positions. The night position reduces
glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.
110
The rear view mirror has a compass
function to indicate the vehicle’s
direction.
Refer to Compass on page 168 .
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Mirrors
Adjusting the Power Mirrors
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
4. When you finish, move the
selector switch to the center (off)
position. This turns the
adjustment switch off to keep your
settings.
Heated Mirrors
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
Instruments and Controls
SELECTOR SWITCH
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
2. Move the selector switch to L
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
side).
3. Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to move the
mirror right, left, up, or down.
If equipped
The outside mirrors are heated to
remove fog and frost. With the
ignition switch in the ON (II)
position, turn on the heaters by
pressing the button. The indicator in
the button comes on as a reminder.
Press the button again to turn the
heaters off.
111
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Interior Convenience Items
VANITY MIRROR
SUN VISOR
CENTER CONSOLE
SUNGLASSES
HOLDER
BEVERAGE HOLDER
GLOVE BOX
ACCESSORY
POWER
SOCKETS
CENTER POCKET
* : On vehicle without navigation system
112
COAT HOOK
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET
CENTER UPPER
POCKET*
CENTER LOWER POCKET
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
BEVERAGE HOLDERS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Interior Convenience Items
Center Console
Console Compartments
To open the rear of the compartment,
push the button at the end of the
tray, then slide the tray forward. To
close, slide the tray back in place.
Your vehicle has a multi-function
center console. It includes beverage
holders, storage compartments, an
armrest, a coin holder, and a storage
tray.
To open the front of the
compartment, squeeze the knob, and
push it forward while sliding the
beverage holder. To close, squeeze
the knob and pull the compartment
backward until the beverage holder
latches.
There are two removable partitions
in the main compartment. The
partitions can be used to divide the
main compartment, or can be stored
at the front of the compartment.
The console compartment light
comes on when the instrument panel
lights are on.
113
Instruments and Controls
The center console main
compartment is under the tray and
the beverage holder. You can access
the main compartment in two ways
(front or rear).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Interior Convenience Items
Cargo Hooks
COIN HOLDER
CARGO HOOKS
You can put small items in the upper
console compartment. To use it, pull
up on the lever and lift up the
armrest.
If equipped
The upper console compartment has
a removable coin holder. Pull the
coin holder straight up to remove it.
To install it, push it down along the
guides on the side of the
compartment.
114
There are two cargo hooks for
plastic grocery bags at the back of
the center console. They are
designed to hold light items. Heavy
objects may damage the hooks.
Beverage Holders
The center console has two beverage
holders on the front. Your vehicle
also has beverage holders in the rear
seat armrest and the rear door
panels.
Be careful when you are using the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Liquid can also spill
from the door panel beverage
holders when you close the doors.
Use only resealable containers in the
door beverage holders.
Spilled liquids can damage the
upholstery, carpeting, and electrical
components in the interior.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Interior Convenience Items
Glove Box
Open the glove box by pulling the
handle. Close it with a firm push.
Lock or unlock the glove box with
the master key.
Coat Hooks
Sunglasses Holder
SUNGLASSES HOLDER
An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Always keep the glove box
closed while driving.
These hooks are not designed for
large or heavy items.
To open the sunglasses holder, push
on the rear edge. Make sure the
holder is closed while you are driving.
Some larger styles of sunglasses
may not fit in the holder.
115
Instruments and Controls
The glove box light comes on when
the parking lights are on.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Interior Convenience Items
Accessory Power Sockets
FRONT
There are three accessory power
sockets in your vehicle. Two
accessory power sockets are above
the center pocket on the dashboard,
and another is on the back of the
center console.
116
REAR
These sockets are intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps).
To use an accessory power socket,
the ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
None of the sockets will power an
automotive type cigarette lighter
element. When both sockets are
being used, the combined power
rating of the accessories should be
120 watts or less (10 amps).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Interior Convenience Items
Make sure you put the sun visor
back in place when you are getting
into or out of the vehicle.
Sun Visor
Vanity Mirror
To use the sun visor, pull it down.
When using the sun visor for the
side window, remove the support rod
from the clip, and swing it out.
In this position, the sun visor can be
adjusted by moving it on its slider.
Do not use the extended sun visor
over the inside mirror.
Pull up the vanity mirror cover to use
it.
The light comes on when you pull up
the cover.
The light will not come on if the sun
visor is slid outward.
117
Instruments and Controls
SUN VISOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Interior Lights
Interior Light Control Switch
DOOR POSITION
ON
OFF
When the interior light control switch is
in the ON position:
All the individual map lights and
the rear console light come on and
stay on as long as the switch
remains in the ON position.
118
When the switch is in the door position:
The individual map lights and the
rear console light come on when
any door is opened, or when the
remote transmitter or the key is
used to unlock the doors. When
the doors are closed, each
individual map light can be turned
on and off by pushing the lens.
The lights fade out about 30
seconds after all the doors are
closed.
With any door left open and the
key is removed from the ignition
switch, the lights stay on about 3
minutes, then go out.
When the switch is in the OFF position:
None of the lights come on when a
door is opened.
The map lights in the front can be
turned on and off by pushing each
lens. The rear map lights cannot
be used.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Interior Lights
Individual Interior Lights
The courtesy light in each door
comes on when you open that door.
The light around the ignition switch
only comes on when you open the
driver’s door. After you close the
door, the ignition switch light fades
out in about 30 seconds.
The map lights stay on when the
interior light control switch is in the
door position and the map light
switch is on.
The courtesy light in the back of the
center console comes on when you
open any door with the interior light
control switch in the door position.
After you close the doors, the light
fades out.
Courtesy Light
If equipped
The courtesy light between the front
map lights comes on when you turn
the parking lights on. To adjust its
brightness, turn the instrument
panel brightness control dial on the
dashboard (see page 78 ).
119
Instruments and Controls
Individual Map Lights
Turn on a front individual map light
by pushing the lens. Push the lens
again to turn it off. With the interior
light control switch in the door
position, a rear map light can be
turned on by pushing the lens. Push
the lens again to turn it off.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Bed Lights
If you turn the ignition switch to
ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
without turning off the bed lights,
the lights and the indicator will
remain on, then go off after 20
minutes (see page 69 ).
BED LIGHT SWITCH
Your vehicle has bed lights in the
pickup bed: a light on each front
upper and rear bottom side. With the
shift lever in the Park position, the
bed lights come on when you push
the bed light switch on the
dashboard, swing open the tailgate,
or open the In-Bed Trunk. The
indicator on the instrument panel
also comes on to remind you that the
bed lights are on.
120
To turn off the lights, push the light
switch again, or close the tailgate
and the In-Bed Trunk.
When you move the shift lever out of
the Park position, the bed lights go
off and cannot be used.
Main Menu
Features
The heating and air conditioning
system in your vehicle provides a
comfortable driving environment in
all weather conditions.
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio
system that requires a code number
to enable it.
On all models except RT, RTX, and
Canadian LX
The security system helps to
discourage vandalism and theft of
your vehicle.
121
Features
The standard audio system has
many features. This section
describes those features and how to
use them. (If you have an optional
audio system, refer to the operating
instructions that came with it.)
Vents, Heating, and A/C .............. 122
Using the Heater ....................... 126
Using the A/C ............................ 126
Using Automatic Climate
Control .................................... 128
Rear Ventilation ......................... 129
Dual Temperature Control ........... 130
Climate Control Sensors ............... 132
Playing the AM/FM Radio ........... 133
AM/FM Radio Reception ............. 140
Playing the XM Satellite Radio .. 142
Playing a CD, CD Changer ........... 148
Protecting Your CDs ..................... 159
CD Player/Changer Error
Messages .................................... 160
Remote Audio Controls................. 161
Playing an Optional Audio Unit.... 161
Radio Theft Protection.................. 162
Setting the Clock ........................... 163
Security System ............................. 164
Cruise Control ................................ 165
Compass.......................................... 168
HomeLink Universal
Transceiver................................. 171
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)-Required
Federal Explanation .............. 175
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Vents, Heating, and A/C
RT, RTX, and
FAN CONTROL DIAL
MAX A/C BUTTON
Canadian LX models
AIR CONDITIONING
MODE BUTTONS
BUTTON
RECIRCULATION
BUTTON
RTS, RTL, and
Canadian EXL models
WINDSHIELD DEFROST
BUTTON
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
MODE BUTTONS
FAN CONTROL BUTTONS
AIR CONDITIONING
AUTO BUTTON BUTTON
MODE
BUTTON
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
OFF BUTTON
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
122
DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
DISPLAY
DUAL BUTTON
WINDSHIELD DEFROST BUTTON
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Vents, Heating, and A/C
On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXL
models, see pages 128 and 129 for
information on automatic climate
control and semi-automatic operation.
Fan Control
On RT, RTX, and Canadian LX models
Dual Button
On RT, RTX, and Canadian LX models
On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXL
models
Turning this dial clockwise increases
the temperature of the airflow.
On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXL
models
The driver and passenger can select
independent temperature settings.
On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXL
models
Push the DUAL button. When the
indicator in the button is on, turn the
dials to adjust the temperature.
Select the fan speed by pressing the
fan control buttons (
or
).
The fan speed is shown in vertical
bars on the display.
When the indicator in the DUAL
button is off, both sides adjust to the
driver’s side temperature.
Press the DUAL button to select
dual temperature control mode (see
page 130 ).
You can set the temperatures for the
driver’s side and the passenger’s side
separately when this button is
pressed (indicator on). When the
indicator in the DUAL button is off,
you can adjust both sides to the
same temperature with the driver’s
side temperature control dial.
CONTINUED
123
Features
Turn the dial clockwise to increase
the fan speed and airflow. Turn the
dial counterclockwise to decrease it.
Temperature Control
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning on and off. You will see
A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.
When you turn the A/C off, the
system cannot regulate the inside
temperature if you set the
temperature control below the
outside temperature.
Recirculation Button
When the recirculation indicator is
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
sent throughout the system again.
When the indicator is off, air is
brought in from the outside of the
vehicle (fresh air mode).
The outside air intakes for the
heating and cooling system are at
the base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.
The system should be left in fresh
air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
Switch to recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.
124
Mode Control
Use the mode control buttons to
select the vents air flows from. Some
air will flow from the dashboard
corner vents in all modes.
Each time you press the MODE
button (On RTS, RTL, and Canadian
EXL models) or either mode button
(On RT, RTX, and Canadian LX
models), the display shows the mode
selected.
Air flows from the center,
corner, and rear vents in the
dashboard.
Airflow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard, rear and
the floor vents.
Air flows from the floor
vents.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Airflow is divided between
the floor vents and the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
Press the
button, Air flows
from the defroster vents at the base
of the windshield.
On RT, RTX, and Canadian LX models
The system automatically
turns on the A/C and switches to
recirculation mode. Air flows from
the center, side, and rear vents in the
dashboard. Pressing the
or
A/C button cancels MAX A/C.
Ventilation
The flow-through ventilation system
draws in outside air, circulates it
through the interior, then exhausts it
through vents near the back window.
1. Set the temperature to the lower
limit.
2. Make sure the A/C is off.
and fresh air mode.
3. Select
4. Set the fan to the desired speed.
When you select
, the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode.
On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXL
models
When you select
, the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C.
125
Features
On RT, RTX, and Canadian LX models
When you select
or
,
the system automatically switches to
fresh air mode and turns on the A/C.
MAX A/C Button
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Using the Heater
The heater uses engine coolant to
warm the air. If the engine is cold, it
will be several minutes before you
feel warm air coming from the
system.
.
1. Select
When you select
, the system
automatically switches to the fresh
air mode.
2. Set the fan to the desired speed.
3. Adjust the warmth of the air with
the temperature control dial.
126
Using the A/C
Air conditioning places an extra load
on the engine. Watch the engine
coolant temperature gauge (see page
72 ). If it moves near the red zone,
turn off the A/C until the gauge
reading returns to normal.
1. Turn on the A/C by pressing the
button. The display shows A/C
ON on when a fan speed is
selected.
2. Make sure the temperature is set
to maximum cool.
.
3. Select
4. If the outside air is humid, select
recirculation mode. If the outside
air is dry, select fresh air mode.
5. Set the fan to the desired speed.
If the interior is very warm, you can
cool it down more rapidly by partially
opening the windows, turning on the
A/C, and setting the fan to
maximum speed in fresh air mode.
On RT, RTX, and Canadian LX models
To cool the interior with MAX A/C:
1. Set the fan to the desired speed.
2. Select MAX A/C mode.
The system automatically turns on
the A/C, selects
, and
switches to recirculation mode.
3. Make sure the temperature is set
to maximum cool.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Dehumidify the Interior
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes
moisture from the air. When used in
combination with the heater, it
makes the interior warm and dry.
This setting is suitable for all driving
conditions whenever the outside
temperature is above 32°F (0°C).
1. Set the fan to the desired speed or
high for faster defrosting.
. When you select
2. Select
, the system automatically
switches to fresh air mode and
turns on the A/C. The A/C
indicator will not be displayed if it
was off to start with.
3. Adjust the temperature so the
airflow feels warm.
4. To increase airflow to the
windshield, close the side vents.
Automatic Heated Wiper Zone
Your vehicle has heating wires at the
bottom of the windshield to help
heat the wiper blades and the
windshield. If the outside
temperature is near freezing, the
heater turns on automatically when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. The heater turns
off automatically when the outside
temperature is above freezing.
This function helps to increase wiper
performance when the wiper arms
sit in the parked position in snowy or
icy conditions.
When you switch to another mode
from
, the A/C stays on.
Press the A/C button to turn it off.
127
Features
1. Turn the fan on.
2. Press the A/C button.
and fresh air mode.
3. Select
4. Adjust the temperature to your
preference.
To Defog and Defrost
To remove fog from the inside of the
windows:
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Vents, Heating, and A/C
To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice
From the Windows
. The system
1. Select
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C. The
A/C indicator does not come on if
it was off to start with.
.
2. Select
3. Set the fan and temperature
controls to maximum level.
To clear the windows faster, you can
close the dashboard corner vents by
rotating the wheel next to
(passenger’s side) or below it
(driver’s side). This will send more
warm air to the windshield defroster
vents. Once the windshield is clear,
select fresh air mode to avoid
fogging the windows.
For your safety, make sure you have
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
128
Using Automatic Climate Control
On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXL
models
The automatic climate control
system adjusts the fan speed and
airflow levels to maintain the interior
temperature you select.
Press the AUTO button.
Set the desired temperature by
turning the temperature control
dial. You will see AUTO in the
system’s display.
The system automatically selects the
proper mix of conditioned and/or
heated air that will, as quickly as
possible, raise or lower the interior
temperature to your preference.
When you set the temperature to its
lower limit (
) or its upper limit
(
), the system runs at full
cooling or heating only. It does not
regulate the interior temperature.
In cold weather, the fan will not
come on automatically until the
heater starts to develop warm air.
Dual Temperature Control − When
the indicator in the DUAL button is
on, the driver’s side and passenger’s
side temperature can be controlled
independently (see page 130 ).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Semi-automatic Operation
To Turn Everything Off
On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXL
models
On RT, RTX, and Canadian LX models
Making any manual selection causes
the word AUTO in the display to go
out.
Turning the fan speed control dial all
the way to the left shuts the system
off.
DIAL
On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXL
models
Features
You can manually select various
functions of the climate control
system when it is in full automatic
mode. All other features remain
automatically controlled.
Rear Ventilation
If you press OFF, the climate control
system shuts off.
−Keep the system off for short
periods only.
−To keep stale air and mustiness
from collecting, you should have
the fan running at all times.
TAB
You can adjust the direction of the
air coming from the rear vents in the
back of the center console by
moving the tab in the center of each
vent up-and-down and side-to-side.
You can also adjust the amount of
airflow by turning the dial between
the vents.
129
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Dual Temperature Control
On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXL
models
Your vehicle has two temperature
control dials, one for the driver, and
one for the front passenger.
The driver’s side and passenger’s
side can be controlled independently
by adjusting these dials when the
green indicator in the DUAL button
is on.
DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
DISPLAY
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
Temperature Control Dials
Push AUTO or
to turn on the
system. The selected temperatures
appear in the display. When the
indicator in the DUAL button is off,
you can adjust both sides to the
same temperature by adjusting the
driver’s side temperature control dial.
DUAL BUTTON
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
U.S. model is shown
130
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Dual Temperature Control
DRIVER’S SIDE
PASSENGER’S SIDE
Features
To set the driver’s side temperature
differently than the passenger’s,
press the DUAL button, then turn
the driver’s control dial. To set the
passenger’s side differently than the
driver’s, turn the passenger’s control
dial. You can adjust the passenger’s
side without pressing the DUAL
button first.
When you set the temperature to its
lower or upper limit, it is displayed as
or
.
131
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Climate Control Sensors
Sunlight and Temperature
Sensors
On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXL
models
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
The climate control system has two
sensors. A sunlight sensor is in the
top of the dashboard, and a
temperature sensor is under the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.
132
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing the AM/FM Radio
U.S. RTS model
U.S. RT and RTX models
AUTO SELECT BUTTON
SOUND BUTTON
SOUND BUTTON
POWER BUTTON
VOLUME
KNOB
STEREO INDICATOR
STEREO INDICATOR
AM/FM
BUTTON
AM/FM
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR
PRESET BARS
TUNE BAR
Features
VOLUME
KNOB
POWER BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR
AUTO SELECT
BUTTON
PRESET BARS
TUNE BAR
CONTINUED
133
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing the AM/FM Radio
Canadian EXL model without navigation system
Canadian LX model
AUTO SELECT BUTTON
SOUND BUTTON
SOUND BUTTON
POWER BUTTON
VOLUME
KNOB
POWER BUTTON
VOLUME
KNOB
STEREO INDICATOR
STEREO INDICATOR
FM
BUTTON
AM
BUTTON
FM BUTTON
AM BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR
134
PRESET BARS
TUNE BAR
SCAN
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR
AUTO SELECT
BUTTON
PRESET BARS
TUNE BAR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing the AM/FM Radio
U.S. RTL model with navigation system
U.S. RTL model without navigation system
POWER BUTTON
STEREO INDICATOR
VOLUME KNOB
AUTO SELECT BUTTON
AM/FM BUTTON
SOUND BUTTON
POWER BUTTON
STEREO INDICATOR
SEEK/SKIP BAR
SOUND BUTTON PRESET BARS
AM/FM
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR
Features
VOLUME
KNOB
SCAN BUTTON
TUNE BAR
Canadian EXL model with navigation system
POWER BUTTON
STEREO INDICATOR
VOLUME KNOB
FM BUTTON
AUTO SELECT
AM BUTTON
BUTTON
AUTO SELECT
BUTTON
PRESET BARS
TUNE BAR
SEEK/SKIP BAR
SOUND BUTTON PRESET BARS
SCAN BUTTON
TUNE BAR
135
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing the AM/FM Radio
To Play the AM/FM Radio
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
PWR button or the AM/FM button
(AM or FM button on Canadian
models). Adjust the volume by
turning the volume knob.
On vehicles with navigation system
Pushing the AUDIO button will also
turn on the system (see page 138 ).
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM/FM
button (AM or FM button). On the
FM band, ST will be displayed if the
station is broadcasting in stereo.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not
available.
136
To Select a Station
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, the
preset bars, and AUTO SELECT.
TUNE − Use the TUNE bar to tune
the radio to a desired frequency.
Press the
side of the bar to tune
to a higher frequency, and press the
side to tune to a lower
frequency.
SEEK − The SEEK function
searches up and down from the
current frequency to find a station
with a strong signal. To activate it,
press the
or
side of the
bar, then release it.
SCAN − The scan function samples
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press
the SCAN button, then release it.
You will see SCAN in the display.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal. When it finds
one, it will stop and play that station
for about 10 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
PRESET − Each side of the bars
(1−6) can store one station on AM,
and two stations on FM.
1. Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
twelve stations.
2. Use the tune, seek, or scan
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
3. Pick a preset number (1−6), and
hold it until you hear a beep.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing the AM/FM Radio
AUTO SELECT − If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive your preset stations,
you can use the auto select feature to
find stations in the local area.
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset bar if auto select
cannot find a strong station for every
preset bar.
To turn off auto select, press the
A. SEL button. This restores the
presets you originally set.
Adjusting the Sound
Press the SOUND button repeatedly
to display the SUBWOOFER (if
equipped), BASS, TREBLE, FADER,
and BALANCE settings.
Each mode is shown in the display as
it changes. Turn the VOLUME knob
to adjust the setting to your liking.
When the level reaches the center,
you will see ‘‘
’’ in the display.
The system will automatically return
the display to the selected audio
mode about 5 seconds after you stop
adjusting a mode.
If equipped
SUBWOOFER − Adjusts the
strength of sound from the
subwoofer speaker.
BASS − Adjusts the bass.
TREBLE − Adjusts the treble.
FADER − Adjusts the front-to-back
strength of the sound.
BALANCE − Adjusts the side-toside strength of the sound.
137
Features
Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A.SEL’’
flashes in the display, and the system
goes into scan mode for several
seconds. It stores the frequencies of
six AM, and twelve FM stations in
the preset bars.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset bars
as previously described.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing the AM/FM Radio
Operating the Radio on the
Navigation System Screen
While you are listening to the radio,
you can change to another band by
pressing the AUDIO button next to
the navigation system screen, and
then touching the desired band icon
(FM1, FM2, or AM).
Adjusting the Sound
AUDIO BUTTON
AUTO SELECT, SCAN, and SOUND
are adjustable from the navigation
screen. For an explanation of these
functions, see pages 136 and 137 .
On vehicles with navigation system
AUTO SELECT − Touch the
A.SEL icon to activate the auto select
function. You will see A.SEL flashing
on the display.
In addition to the knobs, buttons, and
bars on the radio control panel, you
can operate some of the radio
controls on the navigation system
screen.
SCAN − Touch the SCAN icon to
activate the scan function. You will
see SCAN in the display. Touch the
icon again to deactivate it.
138
To adjust the sound, push the
AUDIO button, then enter the sound
grid by touching the SOUND icon on
the display.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing the AM/FM Radio
Treble/Bass − To adjust the treble
and bass, touch + or − on each
side of the treble or bass adjustment
bar. The adjustment bar shows you
the current setting.
Audio System Lighting
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control dial to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page 78 ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is off.
Features
Left/Right Balance and Front/
Rear Fader − These modes adjust
the strength of the sound coming
from each speaker. Left/Right
balance adjusts the side-to-side
strength, while Front/Rear fader
adjusts the front-to-back strength.
To adjust the left/right balance,
touch the ‘‘L’’ or ‘‘R’’ icon. To adjust
the front/rear fader, touch the ‘‘FR’’
or ‘‘RR’’ icon.
To see the audio display when you
are finished adjusting the sound,
wait 5 seconds.
139
Main Menu
Table of Contents
AM/FM Radio Reception
Radio Frequencies
The radio can receive the complete
AM and FM bands.
Those bands cover these frequencies:
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz
Radio stations on the AM band are
assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz
apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the
FM band are assigned frequencies at
least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).
Stations must use these exact
frequencies. It is fairly common for
stations to round-off the frequency in
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
140
Radio Reception
How well the radio receives stations
is dependent on many factors, such
as the distance from the station’s
transmitter, nearby large objects,
atmospheric conditions, and even
items stored on the roof rack.
A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
AM station, you will notice the sound
volume becoming weaker, and the
station drifting in and out. If you are
listening to an FM station, you will
see the stereo indicator flickering off
and on as the signal weakens.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will
go off and the sound will fade
completely as you get out of range of
the station’s signal.
Driving very near the transmitter of
a station that is broadcasting on a
frequency close to the frequency of
the station you are listening to can
also affect your radio’s reception.
You may temporarily hear both
stations, or hear only the station you
are close to.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
AM/FM Radio Reception
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Features
Radio signals, especially on the FM
band, are deflected by large objects
such as buildings and hills. Your
radio then receives both the direct
signal from the station’s transmitter,
and the deflected signal. This causes
the sound to distort or flutter. This is
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.
Radio reception can be affected by
atmospheric conditions such as
thunderstorms, high humidity, and
even sunspots. You may be able to
receive a distant radio station one
day and not receive it the next day
because of a change in conditions.
Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
141
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
U.S. RTL model with navigation system
U.S. RTL model without navigation system
POWER BUTTON
XM RADIO BUTTON
VOLUME
KNOB
DISPLAY/MODE BUTTON
POWER BUTTON
VOLUME
KNOB
XM RADIO BUTTON
DISPLAY/MODE BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
PRESET BARS
SCAN BUTTON
PRESET BARS
CATEGORY BAR
142
CATEGORY BAR
TUNE BAR
TUNE BAR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
U.S. RTL model only
Your audio system is capable of
receiving XM Satellite Radio
anywhere in the United States,
except Hawaii and Alaska.
XM radio receives signals from two
satellites to produce clear, highquality digital reception. It offers
many channels in several categories.
Along with a large selection of
different types of music, XM radio
allows you to view channel and
category selections in the display.
The navigation system screen also
shows all XM information when the
AUDIO button is pressed.
Operating the XM Radio
To listen to XM radio, turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position. Push the
PWR button to turn on the audio
You can also change to the XM radio
while you are listening to an FM
station, AM station, CD, etc., by
touching the XM1 or XM2 icon on
the audio display (navigation system
screen).
MODE − To switch between
channel mode and category mode,
press and hold the DISP/MODE
button until the mode changes.
In channel mode, you can select all
of the available channels. In category
mode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical,
etc., you can select all of the
channels within that category.
Each time you press and release the
DISP/MODE button, the display
changes in the following sequence:
Channel name, channel number,
category, artist name, and music title.
Features
XM is a registered trademark of
XM Satellite Radio, Inc.
system, and press the ‘‘XM’’ button.
Adjust the volume by turning the
volume knob. The last channel you
listened to will show in the display.
On vehicles with navigation system
On the audio display, you will see the
selected CHANNEL (number),
CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),
and TITLE (music title).
You may experience periods when
XM Radio does not transmit the
artist’s name and song title
information. If this happens, there is
nothing wrong with your system.
CONTINUED
143
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
TUNE − Press the TUNE bar to
change channel selections. Press
for higher numbered channels
and
for lower numbered
channels. In the category mode, you
can only select channels within that
category.
Preset − You can store up to 12
preset channels using each side of
the preset bar or preset icons on the
screen. Each side of the bar stores
one channel from the XM1 band and
one channel from the XM2 band.
3. Pick a preset number (icon) you
want for that channel. Press and
hold the bar (icon) until you hear a
beep.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
first six channels.
To store a channel:
SEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY) −
Press either side of the CATEGORY
bar (
or
) to select another
category.
SCAN − The scan function gives
you a sampling of all channels while
in the channel mode. In the category
mode, only the channels within that
category are scanned. To activate
scan, press the SCAN button or
touch the SCAN icon on the screen.
The system plays each channel in
numerical order for a few seconds,
then selects the next channel. When
you hear a channel you want to listen
to, press the button or touch the icon
again.
144
1. Press the XM button. Either XM1
or XM2 will show in the display.
2. Use the tune, seek, or scan
function to tune to a desired
channel.
In category mode, only channels
within that category can be selected.
In channel mode, all channels can be
selected.
5. Press the XM button again or
touch the other XM icon (XM1 or
XM2) on the audio display. Store
the next six channels using steps 2
and 3.
Once a channel is stored, press and
release the proper side of the preset
bar (icon) to tune to it.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
XM Radio Display Messages
‘‘LOADING’’ − XM is loading the
audio or program
information.
‘‘UPDATING’’ − The encryption
code is being
updated. Wait
until the
encryption code is
fully updated.
Channels 0 and 1
should still work
normally.
Features
‘‘OFF AIR’’ − The channel
currently selected is
no longer
broadcasting.
‘‘NO SIGNAL’’ − The signal is
currently too
weak. Move the
vehicle to an area
away from tall
buildings, and
with an
unobstructed view
of the southern
horizon.
‘‘ - - - - ’’ − The selected channel
number does not exist or
is not part of your
subscription, or this
channel has no artist or
title information at this
time.
‘‘ANTENNA’’ − There is a problem
with the XM
antenna. Please
consult your dealer.
CONTINUED
145
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
Signal may be blocked by
mountains or large obstacles to
the south.
Signal weaker in
these areas.
The XM satellites are in orbit over
the equator; therefore, objects south
of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Satellite signals are more likely to be
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator. Carrying
large items on a roof rack can also
block the signal.
SATELLITE
GROUND
REPEATER
146
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
Depending on where you drive, you
may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of
these conditions:
There may be other geographic
situations that could affect XM radio
reception.
Receiving Satellite Radio Service
If your XM Radio service has expired
or you purchased your vehicle from
a previous owner, you can listen to a
sampling of the broadcasts available
on XM Satellite Radio. With the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position, push the
PWR button to turn on the audio
system and press the XM RADIO
button. A variety of music types and
styles will play.
If you decide to purchase XM
Satellite Radio service, contact XM
Radio at www.xmradio.com, or at
1-800-852-9696. You will need to give
them your radio I.D. number and
your credit card number. To get your
radio I.D. number, press the TUNE
bar until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.
Your I.D. will appear in the display.
After you’ve registered with XM
Radio, keep your audio system in the
satellite radio mode while you wait
for activation. This should take about
30 minutes.
While waiting for activation, make
sure your vehicle remains in an open
area with good reception. Once your
audio system is activated, you’ll be
able to listen to XM radio broadcasts.
XM Radio will continue to send an
activation signal to your vehicle for
at least 12 hours from the activation
request. If the service has not been
activated after 36 hours, contact XM
Radio.
147
Features
Driving on the north side of an
east/west mountain road.
Driving on the north side of a
large commercial truck on an
east/west road.
Driving in tunnels.
Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south
of you.
Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road.
Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.
Large items carried on a roof rack.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing a CD, CD Changer
U.S. RTS model
U.S. RT and RTX models
LOAD BUTTON
CD SLOT
LOAD INDICATOR
EJECT BUTTON
CD BUTTON
CD SLOT
EJECT BUTTON
CD BUTTON
AM/FM
BUTTON
AM/FM
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR
RANDOM
BUTTON
PRESET BARS
REPEAT
BUTTON
148
SCAN
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR
PRESET BARS
RANDOM
BUTTON
REPEAT
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing a CD, CD Changer
Canadian EXL model without navigation system
Canadian LX model
AM BUTTON
LOAD BUTTON
LOAD INDICATOR
EJECT BUTTON
FM BUTTON
CD SLOT
CD BUTTON
AM BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR
RANDOM
BUTTON
PRESET BARS
REPEAT
BUTTON
CD BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR
EJECT BUTTON
PRESET BARS
Features
FM
BUTTON
CD SLOT
RANDOM
BUTTON
REPEAT
BUTTON
CONTINUED
149
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing a CD, CD Changer
U.S. RTL model with navigation system
U.S. RTL model without navigation system
AM/FM BUTTON
CD BUTTON
RANDOM BUTTON
LOAD INDICATOR
LOAD BUTTON
CD BUTTON
CD SLOT
EJECT BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR
AM/FM
BUTTON
PRESET BARS
REPEAT BUTTON
Canadian EXL model with navigation system
FM BUTTON
CD BUTTON
AM
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR
SCAN BUTTON
RANDOM BUTTON
RANDOM BUTTON
PRESET BARS
REPEAT BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR
150
PRESET BARS
REPEAT BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing a CD, CD Changer
CD Player
RT, RTX, and Canadian LX models
Do not use CDs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the CD
to jam in the unit.
SCAN − The SCAN function
samples all the tracks on the
selected disc in the order they are
recorded. To activate it, press and
release the SCAN button. You will
see SCAN in the display, and you will
get a 10 second sampling of each
track on the selected CD. Press the
SCAN button again to get out of scan
mode.
REPEAT − Press the RPT button
to continuously replay a track. You
will see RPT in the display. Press the
RPT button again to turn it off.
RANDOM − Press the RDM
button to play the tracks in random
order. You will see RDM in the
display. Press the RDM button again
to return to normal play.
You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discs
without using an adapter ring.
151
Features
With the ignition in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position,
insert a CD about halfway into the
CD slot. The drive will pull the CD in
the rest of the way and begin to play
it. You operate the CD player with
the same controls used for the radio.
The number of the track playing is
shown in the display. The system will
continuously play a CD until you
change modes.
To Change Tracks
Push the
side of the SEEK/
SKIP bar to play the next track on
the disc. Push the
side once to
replay the track in play; press it twice
to replay the previous track.
To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold the
or the
side
of the bar.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing a CD, CD Changer
To Stop Playing a CD
Press the eject button (
) to
remove the CD. If you eject the CD,
but do not remove it from the slot,
the system will automatically reload
the CD after 10 seconds and put it in
pause mode. To begin playing, press
the CD button.
Press the AM/FM button (AM or
FM button) to switch to the radio
while a CD is playing. Press the CD
button to play the CD.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR
button or by turning off the ignition,
the CD stays in the drive. When you
turn the system back on, the CD
begins playing where it left off.
152
Operating the Optional CD
Changer
RT, RTX, and Canadian LX models
An optional six disc CD changer is
available for your vehicle from your
dealer.
This disc changer uses the same
controls used for the in-dash CD
player/changer and the radio.
Load the desired CDs into the
magazine, and load the magazine
into the changer according to the
instructions that came with the unit.
To select the CD changer, press the
AUX button. The disc and track
numbers will be displayed. To select
a different disc, use the preset 5
(DISC −) side for a previous disc or
the preset 6 (DISC +) side to select
the next disc in sequence.
If you select an empty slot in the
magazine, the changer will search
for the next available CD to load and
play.
Protecting Discs
For information on how to handle
and protect discs, see page 159 .
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing a CD, CD Changer
Operating the CD Changer
On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXL
models
OPEN BUTTON
Loading CDs in the In-dash CD
Changer
On vehicles with navigation system
LOAD BUTTON
LOAD INDICATOR
Features
Your audio system has an in-dash
CD changer that holds up to six CDs,
providing several hours of
continuous entertainment. You
operate this CD changer with the
same controls used for the radio.
To load CDs or operate the CD
changer, the ignition switch must be
in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
position.
Be careful not to injure your fingers
when opening or closing the
navigation system screen.
CD SLOT
Do not use CDs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the CD
to jam in the unit.
On vehicles with navigation system
The CD changer is behind the
navigation system screen. To use the
CD changer, press the OPEN button
beside the screen. The screen folds
back, and the CD changer appears.
To return the screen to the upright
position, press the OPEN button
again. Do not use the folded screen
as a tray. If you put a cup, for
example, on the screen, the liquid
inside the cup may spill on the
screen when you go over a bump.
1. Press and hold the LOAD button
next to the CD slot until the load
indicator above the slot turns from
amber to green.
To load only one CD, press and
release the LOAD button.
CONTINUED
153
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing a CD, CD Changer
2. The indicators above the disc
buttons of the empty positions will
blink, and the green load indicator
above the CD slot comes on.
3. Insert a CD into the CD slot.
Insert it only about halfway; the
drive will pull it in the rest of the
way. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in the
display. The CD load indicator
turns amber and blinks as the CD
is loaded.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm) discs in this system.
4. When ‘‘LOAD’’ appears again in
the display, insert the next CD into
the CD slot.
Do not try to insert a disc until
‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You could
damage the audio unit.
154
5. Repeat this until all six positions
are loaded. The system will then
begin playing the first CD loaded.
If you stop loading CDs before all six
positions are filled, the system will
wait for 10 seconds, then stop the
load operation and begin playing the
last CD loaded.
If you press the LOAD button while
a CD is playing, the system will stop
playing that CD and start the loading
sequence. It will then play the CD
just loaded.
You can also load a CD into an empty
position while a CD is playing by
pressing the appropriate disc button.
Select an empty disc button (the
indicator above the button is off),
and press the button. The system
will stop playing the current CD and
start the loading sequence. It will
then play the CD just loaded.
On vehicles without navigation system
1. Press and hold the LOAD button
until you hear a beep and see
‘‘LOAD’’ in the display, then
release the button.
To load only one CD, press and
release the LOAD button.
2. On the upper right side of the
display, the disc number for an
empty position will begin blinking,
and the green CD load indicator
will come on.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing a CD, CD Changer
3. Insert a CD into the CD slot.
Insert it only about halfway; the
drive will pull it in the rest of the
way. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in the
display. The CD load indicator
turns red and blinks as the CD is
loaded.
4. When ‘‘LOAD’’ appears again in
the display, insert the next CD into
the CD slot.
Do not try to insert a disc until
‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You could
damage the audio unit.
5. Repeat this until all six positions
are loaded. The system will then
begin playing the last CD loaded.
If you stop loading CDs before all six
positions are filled, the system will
wait for 10 seconds, then stop the
load operation and begin playing the
last CD loaded.
To select a different disc, press the
appropriate side of a preset bar
(1−6). On models with navigation
system, touch the appropriate disc
icon. If you select an empty position
in the CD changer, the system will
go into the loading sequence.
Features
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm) discs in this system.
If you are not loading CDs into all six
positions, press the LOAD button
again after the last CD has loaded.
The system will begin playing the
last CD loaded.
To Play a CD
Select the CD changer by pressing
the CD button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in
the display. The system will begin
playing the last selected disc in the
CD changer. You will see the disc
and track numbers displayed.
When that CD ends, the next CD in
the CD changer is loaded and played.
After the last CD finishes, the
system returns to the first CD.
155
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing a CD, CD Changer
To Change or Select Tracks
Each time you press and release the
side of the TUNE bar, the
system skips forward to the
beginning of the next track. Press
and release the
side to skip
backward to the beginning of the
current track. Press it again to skip
to the beginning of the previous
track.
To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold the
or
side of the
TUNE bar.
156
Track Scan
When you press the SCAN button or
touch the TRACK SCAN icon on the
screen, the first track of the current
disc plays for about 10 seconds. You
will see SCAN in the screen and in
the display. To hear the rest of the
track, press the SCAN button or
touch the TRACK SCAN icon again
within 10 seconds. If you don’t, the
system advances to the next track,
plays about 10 seconds of it, and
continues through the rest of the
tracks the same way. When the
system reaches the last track,
TRACK SCAN is cancelled, and the
CD plays normally.
Disc Scan
On vehicles with navigation system
When you press the SCAN button, or
when you touch the DISC SCAN
icon on the screen, the first track of
the current CD plays for about 10
seconds. You will see D-SCAN in the
display and DISC SCAN in the
screen. To hear the rest of the CD,
press the SCAN button or touch the
DISC SCAN icon again, within 10
seconds. If you don’t, the system
advances to the next disc, plays
about 10 seconds of it, and continues
throughout the rest of the CDs the
same way. When the system reaches
the last disc, DISC SCAN is
cancelled, and the CD plays normally.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing a CD, CD Changer
Random Play within a Disc
When you press the RDM button or
touch the TRACK RANDOM icon on
the screen, the system plays the
tracks of the current disc in random
order. You will see RDM (TRACK
RANDOM) in the display. To turn
this feature off, press the RDM
button (touch TRACK RANDOM)
again.
On vehicles with navigation system
Operation of DISC SCAN and DISC
REPEAT on the screen is possible
only when the screen is in the
upright position.
Features
Track Repeat
When you press and release the RPT
button or touch the TRACK
REPEAT icon on the screen, the
system continuously replays the
current track. As a reminder, you
will see RPT (TRACK REPEAT) in
the display. To turn this feature off,
press the RPT button, or touch the
TRACK REPEAT icon again.
Disc Repeat
On vehicles with navigation system
When you press and hold the RPT
button until D-RPT (DISC REPEAT)
is in the display, or when you touch
the DISC REPEAT icon on the
screen, the system continuously
replays the current disc. As a
reminder, you will see D-RPT in the
display.
157
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing a CD, CD Changer
To Stop Playing a Disc
To take the system out of CD mode,
press the AM/FM button (AM or
FM button) or XM button (U.S.
models). Each time you press the
AM/FM button (AM or FM button),
the system changes to the next
mode (AM, FM1, or FM2). When
you return to CD mode by pressing
the CD button, play will continue
where it left off.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR
button or the ignition switch, play
will continue at the same point when
you turn it back on.
Removing CDs from the In-dash
CD Changer
To remove the disc that is currently
playing, press the eject button. You
will see ‘‘EJECT’’ in the display.
When you remove the disc from the
slot, the system begins the load
sequence so you can load another
disc in that position. If you do not
load another CD within 10 seconds,
the system selects the previous
mode [AM, FM1, FM2, or XM Radio
(U.S. models)].
If you do not remove the CD from
the slot, the system will reload the
CD after 10 seconds and put the CD
changer in pause mode. To begin
playing the CD, press the CD button.
To remove the disc from the
changer, first select it by pressing
the appropriate preset bar or
corresponding number on the screen.
When that disc begins playing, press
the eject button.
158
When you press the eject button
while listening to the radio, or with
the audio system turned off, the disc
that was last selected is ejected.
After that disc is ejected, pressing
the eject button again will eject the
next disc in numerical order. By
doing this six times, you can remove
all the discs from the changer.
You can also eject discs when the
ignition switch is on or off:
To eject one disc, press and release
the eject button.
To eject all discs, press and hold the
eject button until the LOAD
indicator begins to blink.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Your CDs
General Information
When using CD-R or CD-RW discs,
use only high quality CDs labeled
for audio use.
Play only standard round CDs.
Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the
drive or cause other problems.
Handle your CDs properly to
prevent damage and skipping.
To clean a CD, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the CD from the center
to the outside edge.
A new CD may be rough on the
inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness
can flake off and fall on the recording surface of the CD, causing
skipping or other problems. Remove
these pieces by rubbing the inner
and outer edges with the side of a
pencil or pen.
Features
When recording a CD-R or
CD-RW, the recording must be
closed for it to be used by the
system.
Protecting CDs
When a CD is not being played, store
it in its case to protect it from dust
and other contamination. To prevent
warpage, keep CDs out of direct
sunlight and extreme heat.
Handle a CD by its edges; never
touch either surface. Do not place
stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
These, along with contamination
from fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip
pens, can cause the CD to not play
properly or possibly jam in the drive.
Never try to insert foreign objects in
the CD player or the CD changer.
159
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CD Player/Changer Error Messages
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a CD, find the
cause in the chart to the right. If you
cannot clear the error message, take
the vehicle to your dealer.
Message
Cause
Focus Error
Mechanical Error
High Temperature
160
Solution
Press the disc eject button, and remove the
disc(s). Check for an error indication. Insert
the disc(s) again. If the code does not disappear
or the disc(s) cannot be removed, consult your
dealer.
Press the disc eject button, and remove the
disc(s). Check for an error indication. Insert
the disc(s) again. If the code does not disappear
or the disc(s) cannot be removed, consult your
dealer.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remote Audio Controls, Playing an Optional Audio Unit
VOL BUTTON
MODE BUTTON
On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXL
models
Three controls for the audio system
are mounted in the steering wheel
hub. They let you control basic
functions without removing your
hand from the steering wheel.
The VOL button adjusts the volume
up (▲) or down (▼). Press the top
or bottom of the button, hold it until
the desired volume is reached, then
release it.
If you are listening to the radio, use
the CH button to change stations.
Each time you press the top (▲) of
the button, the system goes to the
next preset station on the band you
are listening to. Press the bottom
(▼) to go back to the previous
station.
If you are playing a CD, the system
skips to the beginning of the next
track each time you press the top
(▲) of the CH button. Press the
bottom (▼) to return to the
beginning of the current track. Press
it again to return to the previous
track. You will see the disc and track
numbers in the display.
Auxiliary Input Jack
AUXILIARY
INPUT JACK
Features
CH BUTTON
The MODE button changes the
mode. Pressing the button
repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,
XM Radio (U.S. models), CD (if a
disc is loaded) or a tape (if the
optional tape player is installed and a
tape is loaded).
On vehicles with navigation system
The auxiliary input jack is on the tray
above the glove box. The system will
accept auxiliary input from standard
audio accessories.
When the appropriate audio unit is
connected to the auxiliary input jack,
press the CD/AUX or AUX button to
select the unit.
161
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Radio Theft Protection
Your vehicle’s audio system will
disable itself if it is disconnected
from electrical power for any reason.
To make it work again, you must
enter a specific code with the preset
bars. Because there are hundreds of
number combinations possible from
the five digits, making the system
work without knowing the exact
code is nearly impossible.
You should have received a card that
lists your audio system’s code and
serial numbers. It is best to store this
card in a safe place at home. In
addition, you should write the audio
system’s serial number in this owner’s
manual.
If you lose the card, you must obtain
the code number from your dealer.
To do this, you will need the audio
system’s serial number.
162
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, or the
radio fuse is removed, the audio
system will disable itself. If this
happens, you will see ‘‘CODE’’ in the
frequency display the next time you
turn on the system. Use the preset
bars to enter the code. The code is
located on the radio code card
included in your owner’s manual kit.
When it is entered correctly, the
radio will start playing.
If you make a mistake entering the
code, do not start over; complete the
sequence, then enter the correct
code. You have ten tries to enter the
correct code. If you are unsuccessful
in ten attempts, you must then leave
the system on for 1 hour before
trying again.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Setting the Clock
RT, RTX, and
Canadian LX
models
RTS, RTL, and
Canadian EXL
models
CLOCK SET
BUTTON
CLOCK SET
BUTTON
PRESET BARS
PRESET BARS
On vehicles without Navigation System
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, you will
need to set the clock.
To set the time, press the clock set
button until you hear a beep. The
displayed time begins to blink.
Press and hold the H (Preset 1) side
of the bar until the hour advances to
the desired time. Press and hold the
M (Preset 2) side of the bar until the
minutes advance to the desired time.
Features
U.S. models are shown.
Press the clock set button again to
enter the set time.
You can quickly set the time to the
nearest hour. If the displayed time is
before the half hour, pressing the
clock set button until you hear a
beep, then pressing the R (Preset 3)
side of the bar sets the clock back to
the previous hour.
If the displayed time is after the half
hour, the clock sets forward to the
beginning of the next hour.
For example: 1:06 will reset to 1:00
1:52 will reset to 2:00
On models with Navigation System
The navigation system receives
signals from the global positioning
system (GPS), and the displayed
time is updated automatically by the
GPS. Refer to the navigation system
manual for how to adjust the time.
163
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Security System
If equipped
The security system helps to protect
your vehicle and valuables from theft.
The horn sounds and a combination
of headlights, parking lights, license
plate lights, and taillights flash if
someone attempts to break into your
vehicle or remove the radio. This
alarm continues for 2 minutes, then
the system resets. To reset an
alarming system before the 2
minutes have elapsed, unlock the
driver’s door with the key or the
remote transmitter.
The security system automatically
sets 15 seconds after you lock the
doors, hood, and the In-Bed Trunk.
For the system to activate, you must
lock the doors from the outside with
the key, driver’s lock tab, door lock
switch, or remote transmitter. The
security system indicator above the
driver’s door lock tab starts blinking
immediately to show you the system
is setting itself.
164
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
Once the security system is set,
opening any door (without using the
key or the remote transmitter), the
hood, or the In-Bed Trunk, will cause
it to alarm. It also alarms if the radio
and navigation components are
removed from the dashboard or the
wiring is cut.
The security system will not set if
the hood, In-Bed Trunk, or any door
is not fully closed. If the system will
not set, check the door and tailgate
open monitor and In-Bed Trunk open
indicator on the instrument panel
(see pages 64 and 69 ) to see if the
doors and In-Bed Trunk are fully
closed. Since it is not part of the
monitor display, manually check the
hood.
NOTE: Use the remote transmitter
to quickly check that the hood,
In-Bed Trunk, and all doors are
closed. Push the lock button twice
within 5 seconds. There should be an
audible confirmation beep.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Cruise Control
Using the Cruise Control
RES/ACCEL BUTTON
CANCEL
BUTTON
Improper use of the cruise
control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only
when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
CRUISE
BUTTON
1. Push the CRUISE button. The
indicator in the button will come
on.
NOTE:
The main switch can be left on, even
when the system is not in use.
SET/DECEL
BUTTON
3. Press and release the SET/
DECEL button on the steering
wheel. The indicator on the
instrument panel comes on to
show the system is now activated.
2. Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
CONTINUED
165
Features
Cruise control allows you to maintain
a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Cruise Control
Cruise control may not hold the set
speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your speed increases
going down a hill, use the brakes to
slow down. This will cancel cruise
control. To resume the set speed,
press the RES/ACCEL button. The
indicator on the instrument panel will
come back on.
When climbing a steep hill, the
automatic transmission may
downshift to hold the set speed.
Changing the Set Speed
You can increase the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL
button. When you reach the
desired cruising speed, release the
button.
Push on the accelerator pedal.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed, then press the SET/
DECEL button.
To increase your speed in very
small amounts, tap the RES/
ACCEL button. Each time you do
this, the vehicle will speed up
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
166
You can decrease the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
NOTE: If you need to decrease your
speed quickly, use the brakes as you
normally would.
Press and hold the SET/DECEL
button. Release the button when
you reach the desired speed.
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the SET/DECEL
button. Each time you do this,
your vehicle will slow down about
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Tap the brake pedal lightly with
your foot. The CRUISE
CONTROL indicator on the
instrument panel will go out.
When the vehicle slows to the
desired speed, press the SET/
DECEL button.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Cruise Control
Even with cruise control turned on,
you can still use the accelerator
pedal to speed up for passing. After
completing the pass, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will return to the set cruising speed.
Tap the brake pedal.
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
Push the CRUISE button on the
dashboard.
Resuming the Set Speed
When you push the CANCEL button
or tap on the brake pedal, the system
will remember the previously set
cruising speed. To return to that
speed, accelerate to above 25 mph
(40 km/h) and then press and
release the RES/ACCEL button. The
CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes
on. The vehicle will accelerate to the
same cruising speed as before.
Pressing the CRUISE button turns
the system off and erases the
previous cruising speed.
167
Features
Resting your foot on the brake pedal
causes cruise control to cancel.
Canceling Cruise Control
You can cancel cruise control in any
of these ways:
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Compass
Compass Function
If equipped
Your vehicle has a compass in the
rear view mirror. The compass
indicates the vehicle direction with
illuminated letters; N (north), S
(south), W (west), and E (east). The
center blue icon in the compass is
always on. It serves as a reference
point.
REAR VIEW MIRROR
COMPASS
BUTTON
CENTER ICON
The direction and center position
icons come on when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. The system then begins to
check the vehicle direction and
illuminates the appropriate icon(s).
To turn the compass on or off, press
the compass button on the back of
the rear view mirror.
168
The compass can be affected by
driving near power lines or stations,
across bridges, through tunnels,
over railroad crossings, past large
vehicles, or driving near large
objects that cause magnetic
interference. It can also be affected
by accessories such as antennas and
roof racks that are mounted by
magnets.
The compass mirror has a light
sensor behind the right side of the
rear view mirror. Make sure the
extended sun visor or an accessory is
not covering the sensor.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Compass
Compass Calibration
The compass may need to be
manually calibrated after exposure to
a strong magnetic field. If the
compass seems to continually show
the wrong direction, do this.
1. With the blue center icon
displayed, press and hold the
compass button for about 6
seconds. When the center icon
turns red, release the button.
Compass Zone Selection
In most areas, there is a variation
between magnetic north and true
north. Zone selection is required so
the compass can compensate for this
variation. To check and select the
zone, do this:
2. Press and hold the compass
button for about 3 seconds. When
all of the direction icons begin to
blink, release the button.
3. The blue direction icon(s) blink
and show the current zone.
4. If the zone is incorrect, press and
release the compass button
repeatedly to get to the correct
number.
5. The compass will return to the
normal display about 4 seconds
after you stop adjusting a zone
number.
1. Find the zone for your area on the
zone map (see page 170 ). Each
zone number (1 through 15)
corresponds to a compass zone on
the table (see page 170 ).
CONTINUED
169
Features
NOTE: Do this procedure in an open
area, away from buildings, power
lines, and other vehicles.
2. Drive the vehicle slowly in circles
at less than 5 mph (8 km/h) until
the center icon turns blue. This
icon also turns blue by continuing
to drive the vehicle under normal
driving conditions. When you see
an actual heading on the compass,
calibration is completed.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Compass
Zone Map
170
Compass Display for Each Zone
Main Menu
Table of Contents
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
If equipped
General Information
If you are training HomeLink to
operate a garage door or gate, you
should unplug the motor for that
device during training. Repeatedly
pressing the remote control button
could burn out the motor.
HomeLink stores the code in a
permanent memory. There should
be no need to retrain HomeLink if
your vehicle’s battery goes dead or is
disconnected. If your garage door
opener was manufactured before
April 1982, you may not be able to
program HomeLink to operate it.
They do not have the safety feature
that causes the motor to stop and
reverse if an obstacle is detected
during closing, increasing the risk of
injury.
Important Safety Precautions
Always refer to the opening
instructions and safety information
that came with your garage door
opener or other equipment you
intend to operate with HomeLink. If
you do not have this information,
contact the manufacturer of the
equipment.
For quick and accurate training,
make sure the remote transmitter
for the device (garage door,
automatic gate, security system, etc.)
has a fresh battery.
Training HomeLink
Before you begin − If you just
received your vehicle and have not
trained any of the buttons in
HomeLink before, you should erase
any previously learned codes before
training the first button.
To do this, press and hold the two
outside buttons on the HomeLink
transceiver for about 20 seconds,
until the red indicator flashes.
Release the buttons, then proceed to
step 1.
If you are training the second or
third buttons, go directly to step 1.
1. Unplug the garage door opener
motor from the electrical outlet.
2. Hold the end of the garage door
opener remote transmitter 2 to 5
inches from HomeLink. Make
sure you are not blocking your
view of the red indicator in
CONTINUED
HomeLink.
171
Features
The HomeLink universal
transceiver built into your vehicle
can be programmed to operate up to
three remotely controlled devices
around your home, such as garage
doors, lighting, or home security
systems.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
If the red indicator in HomeLink
continues to flash slowly (does
not flash rapidly), your remote
transmitter may stop
transmitting after a short time.
Go to step 4.
3. Press and hold the remote
transmitter button and one of the
HomeLink buttons at the same
time.
If the red indicator in HomeLink
begins to flash slowly at first,
then rapidly, release both
buttons, and go to step 5.
4. Press and hold the remote
transmitter button and one of the
HomeLink buttons at the same
time. While continuing to hold the
HomeLink button, press and
release the remote transmitter
button every 2 seconds.
If the red indicator in HomeLink
begins to flash slowly at first,
then rapidly, release both
buttons, and go to step 5.
If the red indicator in HomeLink
continues to flash slowly (does
not begin to flash rapidly),
repeat steps 2 thru 4.
5. Plug in the garage door opener
motor, then test the HomeLink
button by pushing it for about 1
172
second.
If the button works,
programming is complete.
If the button does not work go
to step 6.
6. Push and hold the HomeLink
button for a few seconds, then
watch the red indicator on
HomeLink.
If the indicator stays on or
flashes slowly, repeat steps 2
thru 5.
If the indicator flashes rapidly
for 2 seconds then stays on, you
have a rolling code transmitter:
go to ‘‘Training with a Rolling
Code System’’ (see page 173 ).
7. Repeat these steps to train the
other two HomeLink buttons to
operate any other compatible
remotely controlled devices
around your home (lighting,
automatic gate, security system,
etc.).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’
procedure trains HomeLink to the
proper garage door opener code.
The following procedure
synchronizes HomeLink to the
garage door opener so it sends and
receives the correct codes.
1. Make sure you have properly
completed the ‘‘Training
HomeLink’’ procedure.
TRAINING BUTTON
4. Press and hold the button on
HomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds.
5. Press and hold the HomeLink
button again for 3 to 4 seconds.
This should turn off the training
indicator on the garage door
opener unit. (Some systems may
require you to press the button up
to three times.)
3. Press the training button on the
garage door opener unit until the
indicator next to the button comes
on. The indicator may blink, or
come on and stay on. You then
have approximately 30 seconds to
complete the following steps.
6. Press the HomeLink button again
for about 1 second. It should
operate the garage door.
2. Find the ‘‘training’’ button on your
garage door opener unit. The
location will vary, depending on
the manufacturer.
173
Features
Training With a Rolling Code
System
For security purposes, newer garage
door opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’
or variable code. Information from
the remote control and the garage
door opener are needed before
HomeLink can operate the garage
door opener.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Erasing Codes
To erase the codes stored in all three
buttons, press and hold the two
outside buttons until the red
indicator begins to flash, then
release the buttons.
You should erase all three codes
before selling the vehicle.
Retraining a Button
If you want to retrain a programmed
button for a new device, you do not
have to erase all button memory.
You can replace the existing memory
code using this procedure:
1. Press and hold the HomeLink
button to be trained until the
HomeLink indicator begins to
flash slowly.
If a rolling code transmitter was
previously programmed, the
indicator will flash rapidly for 2
seconds, and then stay on for
about 23 seconds.
174
If a standard transmitter was
programmed, the indicator will
stay on for about 25 seconds.
2. Once the HomeLink indicator
begins to flash slowly, continue to
hold the HomeLink button, and
follow steps 3 thru 6 under
‘‘Training HomeLink’’ (see page
171 ).
Customer Assistance
If you have problems with training
the HomeLink Universal Transceiver,
or would like information on home
products that can be operated by
HomeLink, call (800) 355-3515. On
the Internet, go to
www.homelink.com.
HomeLink is a registered
trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale
(If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated.
and
Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
CONTINUED
175
Features
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is provided by
a separate telltale, which displays the
symbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as
intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly.
176
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function
properly.
Main Menu
Before Driving
Break-in Period .............................. 178
Fuel Recommendation .................. 178
Service Station Procedures .......... 179
Refueling..................................... 179
Opening and Closing the
Hood ........................................ 181
Oil Check .................................... 182
Engine Coolant Check .............. 182
Fuel Economy ................................ 183
Accessories and Modifications .... 184
Carrying Cargo .............................. 186
177
Before Driving
Before you begin driving your
vehicle, you should know what
gasoline to use and how to check the
levels of important fluids. You also
need to know how to properly store
luggage or packages. The
information in this section will help
you. If you plan to add any
accessories to your vehicle, please
read the information in this section
first.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period
Help assure your vehicle’s future
reliability and performance by paying
extra attention to how you drive
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).
During this period:
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
acceleration.
Avoid hard braking for the first
200 miles (300 km).
Do not change the oil until the
scheduled maintenance time.
Do not tow a trailer.
You should also follow these
recommendations with an
overhauled or exchanged engine, or
when the brakes are replaced.
178
Fuel Recommendation
Your vehicle is designed to operate
on unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane number of 87 or higher. Use
of a lower octane gasoline can cause
a persistent, heavy metallic rapping
noise that can lead to engine damage.
We recommended using a quality
gasoline containing detergent
additives that help prevent fuel
system and engine deposits.
In addition, in order to maintain good
performance, fuel economy, and
emissions control, we strongly
recommend, in areas where it is
available, the use of gasoline that
does NOT contain manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT.
Use of gasoline with these additives
may adversely affect performance,
and cause the malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel to
come on. If this happens, contact
your authorized dealer for service.
Some gasoline today is blended with
oxygenates such as ethanol or
MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to
operate on oxygenated gasoline
containing up to 10 % ethanol by
volume and up to 15 % MTBE by
volume. Do not use gasoline
containing methanol.
If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another
service station or switch to another
brand of gasoline.
Premium fuel is recommended when
towing in certain conditions (see
page 224 ).
For further important fuel-related
information, please refer to your
Quick Start Guide.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Service Station Procedures
Refueling
Pull
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
1. Park with the driver’s side closest
to the service station pump.
4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leave
some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes.
If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off
2. Open the fuel fill door by pulling
on the handle to the left of the
driver’s seat.
TETHER
ATTACHMENT
FUEL FILL CAP
even though the tank is not full,
there may be a problem with your
vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery
system. The system helps keep
fuel vapors from going into the
atmosphere. Try filling at another
pump. If this does not fix the
problem, consult your dealer.
CONTINUED
179
Before Driving
Stop the engine, and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.
You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank escapes.
The fuel fill cap is attached to the
fuel filler with a tether. Insert the
attachment on the fuel fill cap into
the slit on the fuel fill door.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Service Station Procedures
5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on
until it clicks at least once. If you
do not properly tighten the cap,
the malfunction indicator lamp
may come on (see page 289 ). You
will also see a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL
CAP’’ message on the information
display.
6. Push the fuel fill door closed until
it latches.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Whenever filling a fuel container,
use an approved fuel container, and
place it on the ground. Do not fill the
fuel container in the vehicle,
including the pickup bed and the
In-Bed Trunk. Make sure to put the
fuel pump nozzle in the fuel filler of
the container securely and to handle
it properly.
Gasoline or fuel vapors are
extremely flammable and explosive.
Improperly handling fuel can cause
an explosion in which you can be
seriously injured.
Before placing the fuel container in
the vehicle, wipe up any spill
completely.
Your vehicle has a warning label for
filling a portable fuel container on
the left rear side of the pickup bed.
180
Do not fill a portable fuel
container in the pickup bed.
Static electricity can ignite gas
vapors and you can be burned.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Service Station Procedures
Opening and Closing the Hood
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
SUPPORT ROD
1. Park the vehicle, and set the
parking brake. Pull the hood
release handle under the lower left
corner of the dashboard. The
hood will pop up slightly.
2. Put your fingers under the front
edge of the hood. The hood latch
handle is above the ‘‘H’’ logo. Pull
this handle until it releases the
hood, then lift the hood.
If the hood latch handle moves
stiffly, or you can open the hood
without lifting the handle, the
mechanism should be cleaned and
lubricated.
3. Pull the support rod out of its clip,
and insert the end into either of
the designated holes pointed to by
an arrow.
To close the hood, lift it up slightly to
remove the support rod from the
hole. Put the support rod back into
its holding clip. Lower the hood to
about a foot (30 cm) above the
fender, then let it drop. Make sure it
is securely latched.
181
Before Driving
LATCH
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Service Station Procedures
Oil Check
Engine Coolant Check
DIPSTICK
RESERVE TANK
MAX
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
Wait a few minutes after turning the
engine off before you check the oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange loop).
4. Remove the dipstick again, and
check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
2. Wipe off the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel.
If it is near or below the lower mark,
see Adding Engine Oil on page 246 .
3. Insert the dipstick all the way back
into its hole.
182
MIN
Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see Adding
Engine Coolant on page 249 for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
Refer to Owner’s Maintenance
Checks on page 241 for information
about checking other items on your
vehicle.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fuel Economy
Improving Fuel Economy
Always maintain your vehicle
according to the maintenance
messages displayed on the
information display. See Owner’s
Maintenance Checks on page
241 .
The build-up of snow or mud on
your vehicle’s underside or on the
truck bed adds weight and rolling
resistance. Frequent cleaning
helps your fuel mileage and
reduces the chance of corrosion.
Combine several short trips into
one.
The air conditioning puts an extra
load on the engine which makes it
use more fuel. Use the fresh-air
ventilation when possible.
Before Driving
For example, an underinflated tire
causes more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’
which uses more fuel.
Try to maintain a constant speed.
Every time you slow down and
speed up, your vehicle uses extra
fuel. Use cruise control when
appropriate.
Drive moderately. Rapid
acceleration, abrupt cornering,
and hard braking use more fuel.
Always drive in the highest gear
possible.
183
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying your vehicle, or installing
some non-Honda accessories, can
make it unsafe. Before you make any
modifications or add any accessories,
be sure to read the following
information.
Accessories
Your dealer has Honda accessories
that allow you to personalize your
vehicle. These accessories have
been designed and approved for your
vehicle, and are covered by warranty.
Although non-Honda accessories
may fit on your vehicle, they may not
meet factory specifications, and
could adversely affect your vehicle’s
handling and stability.
184
Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your
vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt
or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding
accessories and modifications.
Your vehicle should not be used to
carry a slide-in camper.
If you install a truck cap, be sure it is
properly installed and does not
exceed your vehicle’s load limits (see
page 187 ).
When properly installed, cellular
phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
low-powered audio systems should
not interfere with your vehicle’s
computer controlled systems, such
as your airbags and anti-lock brakes.
Before installing any accessory:
Make sure the accessory does not
obscure any lights, or interfere
with proper vehicle operation or
performance.
Be sure electronic accessories do
not overload electrical circuits
(see page 291 ) or interfere with
the proper operation of your
vehicle.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Accessories and Modifications
Before installing any electronic
accessory, have the installer
contact your dealer for assistance.
If possible, have your dealer
inspect the final installation.
Some examples are:
Lowering the vehicle with a nonHonda suspension kit that
significantly reduces ground
clearance can allow the
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which
could cause the airbags to deploy.
Larger or smaller wheels and tires
can interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
other systems.
Modifying your steering wheel or
any other part of your vehicle’s
safety systems could make the
systems ineffective.
If you plan to modify your vehicle,
consult your dealer.
Raising your vehicle with a
non-Honda suspension kit can
affect the handling and stability.
Non-Honda wheels, because they
are a universal design, can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components and will not be
compatible with the tire pressure
monitoring system.
185
Before Driving
Do not install accessories on the
side pillars or across the rear
windows. In these areas,
accessories may interfere with
proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
Modifying Your Vehicle
Removing parts from your vehicle,
or replacing components with
non-Honda components could
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, and reliability.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Carrying Cargo
GLOVE BOX
DOOR POCKET
IN-BED TRUNK
DASHBOARD
POCKETS
The pickup bed on your vehicle
allows you to carry heavy and large
cargo. You can also store items in
the In-Bed Trunk and on a roof-rack
(if equipped).
Your vehicle also has these
convenient storage areas inside:
Glove box
Front door and seat-back pockets
Fold-up rear seat with under-seat
storage
Console compartment
Pockets on the dashboard
However, carrying too much cargo,
or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.
CONSOLE
COMPARTMENTS
SEAT-BACK POCKETS
FOLD-UP REAR SEAT WITH UNDER-SEAT STORAGE
PICKUP BED
186
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Carrying Cargo
Load Limits (Payload)
The maximum load for your vehicle
is:
On vehicles without moonroof
1,530 lbs (690 kg)
On vehicles with moonroof
1,480 lbs (670 kg)
Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this
manual.
2. Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
1,530 (1,480) pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the maximum load is
1,530 lbs and there will be five 150
lb. passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 780 lbs.
[1,530 − 750 (5 × 150) = 780 lbs.]
5. Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
in the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity in
step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle (see page 212 ).
In addition, the total weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, accessories,
cargo, and trailer tongue load
must not exceed the gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR) or the
gross axle weight rating (GAWR).
Both are on a label on the driver’s
doorjamb.
187
Before Driving
These figures include the total
weight of all occupants, cargo, and
accessories, and the tongue load if
you are towing a trailer.
To determine the correct cargo and
luggage load limit:
1. Locate the statement, ‘‘the
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed 1,530
(1,480) lbs’’ on your vehicle’s
placard. [The placard is on the
driver’s doorjamb.]
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Carrying Cargo
Carrying Items in the Passenger
Compartment
Store or secure all items that could
be thrown around and hurt
someone during a crash.
Be sure items placed on the floor
behind the front seats cannot roll
under the seats and interfere with
the driver’s ability to operate the
pedals, the proper operation of the
seats, or proper operation of the
sensors under the seats.
Keep the glove box closed while
driving. If it is open, a passenger
could injure their knees during a
crash or sudden stop.
If you fold the rear seats up, tie
down items that could be thrown
about the vehicle during a crash or
sudden stop. Also, keep all cargo
below the bottom of the windows.
If it is higher, it could interfere
with the proper operation of the
side curtain airbags.
Carrying Cargo in the In-Bed
Trunk or on a Roof Rack
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor in the In-Bed Trunk, placing
the heaviest items on the bottom
and as far forward as possible. Tie
down items that could be thrown
during a crash or sudden stop.
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor of the cargo area with the
rear seats folded up, placing the
heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible. Tie
down items that could be thrown
about the vehicle during a crash
or sudden stop.
Make sure the In-Bed Trunk lid is
closed securely before driving.
Be sure the total weight of the
items in the In-Bed Trunk does not
exceed 300 lbs (136 kg).
If you carry any items on a roof
rack, be sure the total weight of
the rack and the items does not
exceed 110 lb (50 kg).
If you use an accessory roof rack,
the roof rack weight limit may be
lower. Refer to the information that
came with your roof rack.
188
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Carrying Cargo
Carrying Cargo in the Pickup Bed
Your vehicle can carry a large
amount of cargo in the pickup bed.
However, the pickup bed is not
intended for carrying passengers.
People who ride in the pickup bed
can be very seriously injured or
killed in a crash (see page 8 ).
Allowing passengers to ride in
the pickup bed or on the tailgate
can result in death or serious
injury in a crash.
The maximum allowable loading
weight on the pickup bed is 1,100
lbs (500 kg). Do not exceed the
load limit (see page 187 ).
Distribute cargo evenly on the
pickup bed. Place the heaviest
items on the bottom and as far
forward as possible of the rear
axle. Tie down and secure all
items that could be thrown out of
the vehicle during a crash or
sudden stop.
If you stack items higher than the
bed sides, tailgate, or back window,
secure them with a net or cover.
This will reduce the risk of items
being thrown out of the pickup
bed during a crash or sudden stop.
When the tailgate is dropped open,
it can be used as an extended
pickup bed. The maximum
allowable weight on the tailgate
while driving is 300 lbs (136 kg).
Exceeding this limit could damage
the tailgate.
Carrying heavy cargo in the
pickup bed will raise your vehicle’s
center of gravity. This can affect
handling and performance. Drive
more slowly and cautiously, and
allow extra time and distance for
braking.
Make sure all passengers ride
in a seat and wear a seat belt
properly.
CONTINUED
189
Before Driving
Make sure your cargo is properly
loaded and all items are secured so
they will not shift or fall out while
driving.
When loading and unloading cargo,
make sure all passengers or any
objects are clear of the tailgate
before opening or closing it. The
tailgate should be closed securely
before driving when it is not used
as the extended pickup bed.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Carrying Cargo
Tie Down Cleats
Never let passengers ride on
the pickup bed or in the In-Bed
Trunk space. This could cause
very serious injuries or death in
a collision. No one should ride
in any position on your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Exceeding load limits or
improperly loading cargo on the
vehicle can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously
injured or killed.
Load the cargo carefully before
starting to drive.
190
TIE DOWN CLEAT
You can also support motorcycles on
the pickup bed floor with the cleats.
The floor panel of the pickup bed is
designed to hold motorcycle tires. Be
sure to tighten motorcycles securely,
with an approved tie-down or
motorcycle strap, according to the
motorcycle maker’s instructions.
When carrying motorcycles or any
other cargo, do not spill any oil or
fluid on the pickup bed. A spilled
liquid may damage the pickup bed.
Your vehicle has six tie down cleats
on the pickup bed.
They are used to secure cargo on the
pickup bed and to install a cargo net
for securing items. Do not use any
other parts of the pickup bed to
secure cargo or nets.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Carrying Cargo
Optional Cargo Net
The cargo net can be used to hold
lightweight items in the pickup bed.
Secure all items properly. The net
may not prevent heavy items from
being thrown outward in a crash or a
sudden stop.
Optional Cargo Cover
The cargo cover can be used to
cover the cargo area on the pickup
bed.
Before Driving
Pickup Bed Repair
Your vehicle’s pickup bed has a rust
resistant surface. To repair small
chips and scratches in the bed, a
repair kit is available from your
dealer. More extensive damage
should be repaired by your dealer.
To avoid problems with the bed
surface and the In-Bed Trunk lid, do
not use spray-in bed liner products.
191
Main Menu
Main Menu
Driving
This section gives you tips on
starting the engine under various
conditions, and how to operate the
automatic transmission. It also
includes important information on
parking your vehicle, the braking
system, the VTM-4 system, the VSA
system, the tire pressure monitoring
system, and facts you need if you are
planning to tow a trailer.
193
Driving
Driving Guidelines ......................... 194
Preparing to Drive ......................... 195
Starting the Engine........................ 196
Automatic Transmission............... 197
Variable Torque Management
4WD (VTM-4) System .............. 203
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) ....................................... 204
Parking ............................................ 206
Braking System.............................. 207
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ................ 208
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
System......................................... 210
Towing Weight Limits .................. 212
Towing Weight Guidelines ........... 214
Towing a Trailer ............................ 215
Off-Highway Driving
Guidelines ................................... 227
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Driving Guidelines
Your vehicle has higher ground
clearance that allows you to travel
over bumps, obstacles, and rough
terrain. It also provides good
visibility so you can anticipate
problems earlier.
Your vehicle allows you to carry
more cargo than a typical passenger
vehicle.
Because your vehicle rides higher
off the ground, it has a high center
of gravity that can cause it to roll
over if you make abrupt turns. Utility
vehicles have a significantly higher
roll over rate than other types of
vehicles.
To prevent rollovers or loss of
control:
Take corners at slower speeds
than you would with a passenger
vehicle.
Avoid sharp turns and abrupt
maneuvers whenever possible.
Make sure the cargo is properly
loaded and all items are secured so
they will not shift while driving.
Do not modify your vehicle in any
way that would raise the center of
gravity.
Do not carry heavy cargo on the
roof.
194
With heavy cargo on the pickup bed,
your vehicle has a higher center of
gravity. Drive slowly and cautiously,
and allow more time and distance for
braking. Loading heavy cargo could
affect your vehicle’s handling and
performance.
See page 227 for off-highway driving
guidelines.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Preparing to Drive
You should do the following checks
and adjustments before you drive
your vehicle.
7. Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
page 110 ).
1. Make sure all windows, mirrors,
and outside lights are clean and
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice.
8. Check the steering wheel
adjustment (see page 79 ).
3. Check that the tailgate is fully
closed when it is not used as an
extended pickup bed.
10.Fasten your seat belt. Check that
your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page 14 ).
4. Visually check the tires. If a tire
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure.
11.When you start the engine, check
the gauges and indicators in the
instrument panel (see page 59 ).
Driving
2. Check that the hood is fully closed.
9. Make sure the doors and In-Bed
Trunk are securely closed and
locked.
5. Check that any items you may be
carrying are stored properly or
fastened down securely.
6. Check the seat adjustment (see
pages 98 and 100 ).
195
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Starting the Engine
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.
3. Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
4. Without touching the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition key to the
START (III) position. Do not hold
the key in the START (III)
position for more than 15 seconds
at a time. If the engine does not
start right away, pause for at least
10 seconds before trying again.
The immobilizer system protects your
vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperlycoded key (or other device) is used, the
engine’s f uel system is disabled. For
more inf ormation, see page 81 .
5. If the engine does not start within
15 seconds, or starts but stalls
right away, repeat step 4 with the
accelerator pedal pressed halfway
down. If the engine starts, release
pressure on the accelerator pedal
so the engine does not race.
6. If the engine fails to start, press
the accelerator pedal all the way
down, and hold it there while
starting to clear flooding. If the
engine still does not start, return
to step 5.
The engine is harder to start in cold
weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at
altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400
meters) adds to this problem.
196
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lever Position Indicators
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it flashes while driving (in
any shift position), it indicates a
possible problem in the transmission.
These indicators on the instrument
panel show which position the shift
lever is in.
SHIFT LEVER
To shift from Park to any position,
press firmly on the brake pedal, and
pull the shift lever toward you. You
cannot shift out of Park when the
ignition switch is in the LOCK (0) or
ACCESSORY (I) position.
CONTINUED
197
Driving
If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem with the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
have the transmission checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.
Shifting
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Automatic Transmission
Park (P) − This position mechanically locks the transmission. Use
Park whenever you are turning off or
starting the engine. To shift out of
Park, you must press on the brake
pedal and have your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Pull the shift lever
towards you, then move it out of
Park.
To shift from:
P to R
R to P
N to R
D to 2
2 to 1
1 to 2
2 to D
D to N
N to D
R to N
198
Do this:
Press the brake pedal, and
pull the shift lever towards
you.
Pull the shift lever towards
you.
Move the shift lever.
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see Shift Lock Release on
page 202 .
You must also pull the shift lever
towards you to shift into Park. To
avoid transmission damage, come to
a complete stop before shifting into
Park. The shift lever must be in Park
for you to remove the key from the
ignition switch.
Reverse (R) − Press the brake
pedal and pull the shift lever towards
you to shift from Park to reverse. To
shift from reverse to neutral, come
to a complete stop, and then shift.
Pull the shift lever towards you
before shifting into reverse from
neutral.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Automatic Transmission
Neutral (N) − Use neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine, or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Shift to the Park
position if you need to leave your
vehicle for any reason. Press on the
brake pedal when you are moving
the shift lever from neutral to
another gear.
D3
D3 SWITCH
Press the D3 switch on the end of
the shift lever to turn this mode on
or off; the D3 indicator comes on
whenever D3 is selected.
The D3 switch can be operated only
when the ignition switch is in the ON
(II) position and the shift lever is in
the D position.
CONTINUED
199
Driving
After you stop in D, 2, 1, N, or R
position with the ignition switch in
the ACCESSORY (I) position for an
extended period, you may not be
able to move the shift lever from
neutral to reverse or Park. In this
case, press the brake pedal, and turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, then shift out of neutral.
Drive (D) − Use this position for
your normal driving. The
transmission automatically selects a
suitable gear (1 through 5) for your
speed and acceleration. You may
notice the transmission shifting up at
higher engine speeds when the
engine is cold. This helps the engine
warm up faster.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Automatic Transmission
D3 INDICATOR
When D3 is on, the transmission
selects only the first three gears.
Use D3 for engine braking when
going down a steep hill.
When towing a trailer on level roads
under normal driving conditions, do
not use D3. This will increase the
automatic transmission fluid
temperature and may cause
overheating.
Second (2) − To shift to second,
pull the shift lever towards you, then
shift to the lower gear. This position
locks the transmission in second
gear. It does not downshift to first
gear when you come to a stop.
Shifting out of the D position will
cancel D3, and cause the D3
indicator to go out. Selecting the D
position again will resume D3, and
the indicator will come on.
Use second gear:
For more power when climbing.
Turning the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position turns D3 off. To
use D3 when you restart the engine,
select the D position, and press the
D3 switch again.
The D3 indicator also comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
200
To increase engine braking when
going down steep hills.
For starting out on a slippery
surface or in deep snow.
To help reduce wheel spin.
When driving downhill with a
trailer.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Automatic Transmission
First (1) − To shift from second to
first, pull the shift lever towards you,
then shift to the lower gear. This
position locks the transmission in
first gear. By upshifting and
downshifting through 1, 2, and D,
you can operate the transmission
much like a manual transmission
without a clutch pedal.
Engine Speed Limiter
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone.
Driving
If you shift into first position when
the vehicle speed is above 28 mph
(45 km/h), the transmission shifts
into second gear first to avoid
sudden engine braking.
201
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Release
This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal and pulling the shift lever does
not work.
COVER
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Make sure the ignition switch is in
the LOCK (0) position.
3. Put a cloth on the notch of the
shift lock release slot cover. Using
a small flat-tipped screwdriver or a
metal fingernail file, carefully pry
on the notch of the cover to
remove it.
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
4. Insert a key into the shift lock
release slot.
5. Push down on the key while you
pull the shift lever towards you
and move it out of Park to neutral.
6. Remove the key from the shift
lock release slot, then reinstall the
cover. Make sure the notch on the
cover is on the instrument panel
side. Press the brake pedal, and
restart the engine.
If you need to use the shift lock
release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have it
checked by your dealer.
202
Main Menu
Table of Contents
VTM-4 System
VTM-4 LOCK BUTTON
To Engage the VTM-4 Lock:
1. The vehicle speed must be below
18 mph (30 km/h).
2. Move the shift lever to first (1),
second (2), or reverse (R) gear.
3. Press the VTM-4 LOCK button.
The indicator in the button comes
on.
To get unstuck, apply light pressure
to the accelerator pedal. Do not spin
the front tires for more than a few
seconds. Because of the amount of
torque applied to the rear tires, they
should not spin. This is normal. If
you are not able to move the vehicle,
stop and reverse direction.
Do not use the VTM-4 LOCK button on
dry, paved roads. Driving on dry,
paved roads with VTM-4 Lock ON may
damage the rear dif f erential when
making a turn. Strange noise and
vibration can also result.
CONTINUED
203
Driving
Your vehicle is equipped with a
variable torque management
4-wheel-drive system (VTM-4) that
distributes engine torque to the
appropriate drive axle depending on
the available traction conditions. The
system is completely automatic,
always active, and does not require
any driver interaction.
If you become stuck, you can
activate the VTM-4 by pressing the
VTM-4 LOCK button while in first
(1), second (2), or reverse (R) gear
below 18 mph (30 km/h). This mode
overrides the auto system to send
maximum torque to the rear axle.
This mode is only intended for
intermittent use at low speed to free
your vehicle if it becomes stuck or
when you encounter a steep grade
with one wheel on a slippery surface.
Generally, you should first allow the
auto mode to operate to adjust for
the available traction conditions.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
VTM-4 System, Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The VTM-4 Lock will temporarily
disengage when the vehicle speed
exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h). The
indicator in the button will remain on.
To Disengage the VTM-4 Lock, do
any of the following:
Press the VTM-4 LOCK button.
Move the shift lever to D.
Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position.
Do not continuously spin the f ront tires
of your vehicle. Continuously spinning
the f ront tires can cause transmission
or rear dif f erential damage.
204
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that turns on every time you start the
engine and monitors the pressure in
your tires while driving.
Each tire has its own pressure
sensor. If the air pressure of a tire
becomes significantly low, the
sensor in that tire immediately sends
a signal that causes the low tire
pressure indicator and the
appropriate tire on the tire pressure
monitor to come on.
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
When this indicator is on, one or
more of your tires is significantly
under inflated. You should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible.
If you think you can safely drive a
short distance to a service station,
proceed slowly, and inflate the tire to
the recommended pressure shown
on the driver’s doorjamb.
If the tire is flat, or if the tire
pressure is too low to continue
driving, replace the tire with the
compact spare tire.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Check the pressure with the tires
cold, after the vehicle has been
parked for at least 3 hours.
Set to the recommended inflation
pressure as specified on the vehicle
placard and in this owner’s manual
(see page 266 ).
The appropriate tire indicator and
low tire pressure indicator comes on
if a tire becomes significantly
underinflated. See Low Tire
Pressure Indicator on page 204 .
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Indicator
This indicator comes on and stays on
if there is a problem with the tire
pressure monitoring system.
If this happens, the system will shut
off and no longer monitor tire
pressures. Have the system checked
by your dealer as soon as possible.
Changing a Tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the low tire
pressure and tire monitor indicators
will come on. Replace the indicated
flat tire with the compact spare tire
(see page 275 ).
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem. You must
use TPMS specific wheels. It is
recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by your dealer or
qualified technician.
After you replace the flat tire with
the compact spare tire, the low tire
pressure indicator stays on. This is
normal; the system is not monitoring
the spare tire pressure. Manually
check the spare tire pressure to be
sure it is correct.
Never use a puncture-repairing agent
in a flat tire. If used, you will have to
replace the tire pressure sensor.
Have the flat tire repaired by your
dealer as soon as possible.
CONTINUED
205
Driving
Although your tire pressure is
monitored, each tire should be
checked monthly, including the
spare.
Tire Pressure Monitor
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), Parking
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Parking
Always use the parking brake when
you park your vehicle. Make sure
the parking brake is set firmly, or
your vehicle may roll if it is parked
on an incline.
Set the parking brake before you put
the transmission in Park. This keeps
the vehicle from moving and putting
pressure on the parking mechanism
in the transmission.
Parking Tips
Make sure the moonroof (if
equipped) and the windows are
closed.
Turn off the lights.
Place any packages, valuables, etc.
in the cargo area in your vehicle or
the In-Bed Trunk, or take them
with you.
Lock the doors.
On vehicles with security system
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
206
Check the indicator on the driver’s
door to verify that the security
system is set.
Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Parking, Braking System
If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the
curb, and set the parking brake.
If the vehicle is facing downhill,
turn the front wheels toward the
curb, and set the parking brake.
Resting your foot on the pedal keeps
the brakes applied lightly, builds up
heat, and reduces their effectiveness.
It also keeps your brake lights on all
the time, confusing drivers behind
you.
Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effectiveness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by taking your foot off the
accelerator and downshifting to a
lower gear.
Check the brakes after driving
through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel
normal. If not, apply them gently and
frequently until they do. Be extra
cautious and alert in your driving.
Braking System Design
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits.
Each circuit works diagonally across
the vehicle (the left-front brake is
connected with the right-rear brake,
etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
Brake Pad Wear Indicators
If the brake pads need replacing, you
will hear a distinctive, metallic
screeching sound when you apply
the brake pedal. If you do not have
the brake pads replaced, they will
screech all the time. It is normal for
the brakes to occasionally squeal or
squeak when you apply them.
207
Driving
Make sure the parking brake is
fully released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or
damage the rear brakes.
Braking System
Your vehicle is equipped with disc
brakes at all four wheels. A power
assist helps reduce the effort needed
on the brake pedal. The anti-lock
brake system (ABS) helps you retain
steering control when braking very
hard.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system (ABS)
helps prevent the brakes from
locking up, and helps you retain
steering control by pumping the
brakes rapidly, much faster than a
person can do it.
The ABS also balances the front-torear braking distribution according
to vehicle loading.
You should never pump the brake pedal.
Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal. This is sometimes
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’
208
You will feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal when the ABS activates, and
you may hear some noise. This is
normal: it is the ABS rapidly
pumping the brakes. On dry
pavement, you will need to press on
the brake pedal very hard before the
ABS activates. However, you may
feel the ABS activate immediately if
you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
ABS Indicator
If this indicator comes on, the antilock function of the braking system
has shut down. The brakes still work
like a conventional system, but
without anti-lock. You should have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
If the indicator comes on while
driving, test the brakes as instructed
on page 290 .
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
If the ABS indicator and the brake
system indicator come on together
and the parking break is fully
released, the front-to-rear braking
distribution system may also shut
down.
The VSA indicator will come on
along with the ABS indicator.
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly, such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather
conditions.
A vehicle with ABS may require a
longer distance to stop on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow, than a vehicle without antilock. Slow down, and allow a greater
distance between vehicles under
those conditions.
Driving
Test your brakes as instructed on
page 290 . If the brakes feel normal,
drive slowly and have your vehicle
repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking
which could cause the rear wheels to
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of
control.
Important Safety Reminders
ABS does not reduce the time or
distance it takes to stop the
vehicle. It only helps with the
steering control during braking.
ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability. Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
209
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
The vehicle stability assist (VSA)
system helps to stabilize the vehicle
during cornering if the vehicle turns
more or less than desired. It also
assists you in maintaining traction
while accelerating on loose or
slippery road surfaces. It does this
by regulating the engine’s output and
by selectively applying the brakes.
When VSA activates, you may notice
that the engine does not respond to
the accelerator in the same way it
does at other times. There may also
be some unusual noise from the
modulator. You will also see the VSA
activation indicator blink.
The VSA system cannot enhance the
vehicle’s driving stability in all
situations and does not control your
vehicle’s entire braking system. It is
still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
210
VSA Activation Indicator
When VSA activates, you will see the
VSA activation indicator blink (see
page 67 ).
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
If this indicator comes on while
driving, pull to the side of the road
when it is safe, and turn off the
engine. Reset the system by
restarting the engine. If the VSA
system indicator stays on, or comes
back on while driving, have the VSA
system inspected by your dealer.
If the indicator does not come on
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON (II) position, there may be a
problem with the VSA system. Have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
If the low tire pressure indicator
comes on (see page 204 ), the VSA
system automatically turns on even if
you turn it off with the VSA OFF
button.
Without VSA, your vehicle will have
normal braking and cornering ability,
but it will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
VSA Off Switch
In certain unusual conditions when
your vehicle gets stuck in shallow
mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the VSA temporarily
switched off. When the VSA system
is off, the traction control system is
also off. You should only attempt to
free your vehicle with the VSA off if
you are not able to free it when the
VSA is on.
This switch is above the parking
brake release handle. Press it to turn
the VSA system on and off.
If you install winter tires, make sure
they are the same size as those that
were originally supplied with your
vehicle. Exercise the same caution
during winter driving as you would if
your vehicle was not equipped with
VSA.
When VSA is off, the VSA activation
indicator comes on as a reminder.
VSA is turned on every time you
start the engine, even if you turned it
off the last time you drove the
vehicle.
211
Driving
Immediately after freeing your
vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on
again. We do not recommend driving
your vehicle with the VSA and
traction control systems switched off.
VSA and Tire Sizes
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the VSA to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are of the same size
and type as your original tires (see
page 269 ).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Towing Weight Limits
Your vehicle has been designed to
tow a trailer, as well as carrying
passengers and their cargo. To
safety tow a trailer, you should
carefully observe the load limits (see
page 187 ), use the proper equipment,
and follow the guidelines in this
section.
Load Limits
Be sure to read the Off-Highway
Driving Guidelines section on page
227 if you plan to tow off paved
surfaces.
Exceeding any load limit or
improperly loading your vehicle
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt
or killed.
Check the loading of your
vehicle and trailer carefully
before starting to drive.
212
Total Trailer Weight
Tongue Load
The maximum weight of the trailer
and everything in or on it depends on
the number of occupants in your
vehicle and the type of trailer being
towed (see page 214 ).
The weight that the tongue of a fullyloaded trailer puts on the hitch
should follow the recommended load
guidelines (see page 214 ). Too
much tongue load reduces front-tire
traction and steering control. Too
little tongue load can make the
trailer unstable and cause it to sway.
Towing a load that is too heavy can
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling and performance.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Towing Weight Limits
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) − The maximum
allowable weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all accessories, all cargo,
and the tongue load is 6,050 lbs
(2,745 kg).
Gross Combined Weight Rating
(GCWR) − The maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle and trailer is 10,088 lbs
(4,575 kg) with the proper hitch.
To help ensure a safe drive to a scale,
or if you cannot get to a public scale,
we recommend that you estimate
your total trailer weight and tongue
load as described.
Driving
Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) − The maximum
allowable weight on the vehicle axles
is 3,105 lbs (1,410 kg) on the front
axle, and 3,245 lbs (1,475 kg) on the
rear axle.
Estimating Loads
The best way to confirm that all
loads are within limits is to check
them at a public scale (see page
212 ).
To Estimate the Total Trailer Weight
Add the weight of your trailer (as
quoted by the manufacturer) with
everything in or on the trailer. Then
check the tables on page 214 to
make sure you do not exceed the
limit for your conditions.
The GCWR must be reduced 2
percent for every 1,000 feet (305
meters) of elevation.
213
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Towing Weight Guidelines
Total Trailer Weight and Tongue Load Guidelines:
Number of
Occupants*
2
3
4
5
214
Max. Trailer Weight
Max. Tongue Load**
5000 lbs (2268 kg)
4750 lbs (2155 kg)
4750 lbs (2155 kg)
4500 lbs (2041 kg)
600 lbs (272 kg)
600 lbs (272 kg)
570 lbs (258 kg)
516 lbs (234 kg)
*
The corresponding weight limits assume occupants fill seats from the front of the vehicle to the back, each occupant weighs 150 lbs (70 kg),
and each has 15 lbs (7 kg) of cargo in the cab, pickup bed, or In-Bed Trunk. Any additional weight, including cargo or accessories, reduces
the maximum trailer weight and maximum tongue load. Never exceed the gross axle weight ratings (see page 213 ).
**
Recommended tongue load should be 5−15% of the total trailer weight for boat trailers, and 10−15% of the total trailer weight for all other
trailers.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Towing a Trailer
Checking Loads
To accurately check your loads at
the public scale, the vehicle and
trailer should be fully loaded, and all
occupants should stay in the vehicle
while the attendant watches the
scale.
2. Check the gross vehicle weight.
Limit: 6,050 lbs (2,745 kg)
1. Check the front gross axle weight.
Limit: 3,105 lbs (1,410 kg)
4. If you cannot weigh the rear axle
directly, you can calculate the rear
gross axle weight by subtracting
the weight in step 1 from the
weight in step 2.
Limit: 2,945 lbs (1,335 kg)
6. Check the weight of the hitched
trailer. Write this number down.
215
Driving
3. Check the rear gross axle weight.
Limit: 3,252 lbs (1,475 kg)
5. Check the gross combined weight.
Limit: 10,088 lbs (4,575 kg)
Remember, maximum gross
combined weight should be
decreased 2 % for every 1,000 feet
(305 meters) of elevation.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Towing a Trailer
7. Check the weight of the unhitched
trailer. Limit: See page 212 .
8. Calculate the tongue load.
Subtract the weight in step 6 from
the weight in step 7.
Limit: See page 214 .
Recommended: See page 214 .
216
Towing Equipment and
Accessories
Towing generally requires a variety
of supplemental equipment. To
ensure the best quality, we
recommend that you purchase
Honda equipment whenever possible.
We strongly recommend that you
have your dealer install a class 3
hitch. Using non-Honda equipment
may result in serious damage to your
vehicle.
Your dealer offers an optional trailer
package for models other than RTX.
The package includes a hitch, a ball
mount, and a wiring harness.
Read the trailer manufacturer’s
instructions, and select the
appropriate draw bar for the height
of the trailer you will be towing.
Discuss any additional needs with
your trailer sales or rental agency,
and make sure all equipment is
properly installed, maintained, and
also meets state, federal, province,
and local regulations.
Hitch
All models except RTX
Weight Distributing Hitch
A weight distributing hitch is not
recommended for use with your
vehicle, as an improperly adjusted
weight distributing hitch may reduce
handling, stability, and braking
performance.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Towing a Trailer
Trailer Brakes
Honda requires that any trailer with
a total trailer weight of 1,000 lbs (455
kg) or more have its own brakes.
There are two common types of
trailer brakes: surge and electric.
Surge brakes are common for boat
trailers, since the brakes will get wet.
See your trailer manufacturer for
more information on installing
electric brakes.
Have a qualified mechanic install
your trailer brake controller
following the trailer brake controller
manufacturer’s instructions. Failure
to properly install the trailer brake
controller may increase the distance
it takes for you to stop your vehicle
when towing a trailer.
Use this illustration to identify each
terminal in the trailer brake
controller connector.
ELECTRIC BRAKE
(BROWN/WHITE)
GROUND
(BLACK)
BRAKE
(20A)
(BLUE)
STOP
(WHITE/BLACK)
CONTINUED
217
Driving
If you choose electric brakes, be
sure they are electronically actuated.
Do not attempt to tap into your
vehicle’s hydraulic system. No
matter how successful it may seem,
any attempt to attach trailer brakes
to your vehicle’s hydraulic system
will lower braking effectiveness and
create a potential hazard.
A factory installed, 4-pin gray
connector is located under the
instrument panel near the top of the
parking brake pedal. This connector
has all of the circuits required to
install most electric trailer brake
controllers. A jumper harness to
adapt your electric trailer brake
controller to the vehicle is included
with the optional Genuine Honda
trailer hitch kit. To obtain a trailer
hitch kit, see your dealer.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Towing a Trailer
Safety Chains
Spare Tires
Always use safety chains when you
tow a trailer. Make sure the chains
are secured to the trailer and hitch,
and that they cross under the tongue
and can catch the trailer if it
becomes unhitched. Leave enough
slack to allow the trailer to turn
corners easily, but do not let the
chains drag on the ground.
When towing a trailer, we
recommend that you carry a full-size
spare wheel and tire for your vehicle
and trailer. See page 269 for proper
tire size, page 280 for how to store a
full size wheel and tire, and page
275 for information on changing a
flat tire.
Sway Control
This device is recommended if your
trailer tends to sway. Your trailer
maker can tell you what kind of sway
control you need and how to install it.
Trailer Mirrors
Many states and provinces require
special exterior mirrors when towing
a trailer. Even if they don’t, you
should install special mirrors if you
cannot clearly see behind you, or if
the trailer creates a blind spot.
218
Remember to unhitch the trailer
before changing a flat. Ask your
trailer sales or rental agency where
and how to store the trailer’s spare
tire.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Towing a Trailer
Trailer Lights
LEFT TURN SIGNAL
AND BRAKE LIGHTS
(GREEN/WHITE)
TAILLIGHTS
(GREEN/BLACK)
RIGHT TURN SIGNAL
AND BRAKE LIGHTS
(GREEN/RED)
BACK-UP LIGHTS
(BLUE)
GROUND
(BLACK)
ELECTRIC BRAKE
(BROWN/WHITE)
+B CHARGE
(GREEN)
Driving
GROUND
(BLACK)
Trailer lights and equipment must
comply with federal, state, province,
and local regulations. Check trailer
light requirements for the areas
where you plan to tow, and use only
equipment designed for your vehicle.
Since lighting and wiring vary with
trailer type and brand, you should
also have a qualified mechanic install
a suitable connector between the
vehicle and the trailer.
Refer to the above illustration for
wiring information.
We recommend that you have your
dealer install a Honda wiring harness
and converter. This harness has
been designed for your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with a
connector to install an optional trailer
lighting connector that mates with
your vehicle.
219
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Towing a Trailer
Towing Equipment
Installing the Cover
Installing the Ball Mount
On U.S. RTX model only
TRAILER HITCH
7-PIN TRAILER CONNECTOR
4-PIN TRAILER
CONNECTOR
HITCH PIN
CLIP
TRAILER HITCH
COVER
HITCH PIN
BALL MOUNT
TRAILER HITCH
Your vehicle has a class 3 trailer
hitch as standard equipment.
The cover, the ball mount, the hitch
pin, the hitch pin clip, and the jumper
harness are stored in the In-Bed
Trunk.
Also see page 218 for trailer-related
information.
220
We recommend that you always use
the cover when you are not using the
ball mount to keep dirt, mud, and
snow from clogging the hitch.
Install the ball mount before you tow
a trailer. Check for and remove
foreign material inside of the trailer
hitch before installing the ball mount.
To install the cover, slide it into the
opening at the end of the trailer
hitch. To remove the cover, pull it
out and store it in a safe place.
To install the ball mount, slide it into
the trailer hitch. Line up the holes in
the trailer hitch with the holes in the
ball mount, then insert the hitch pin
into the hole. Secure the hitch pin
with the hitch pin clip.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Towing a Trailer
Connecting the Trailer Connectors
LID
RETAINING
TAB
RETAINING
TAB
3. Insert the connector securely into
the socket.
COVER
4. Hook the retaining tab on the
inner side of the lid against the
retaining tab of the connector to
prevent disconnection during
operation.
SOCKET
4-PIN TRAILER
CONNECTOR
SOCKET
4-PIN TRAILER CONNECTOR
The 7-pin trailer connector is needed
for the trailer lights. To connect the
connector, do this:
The 4-pin trailer connector is also
needed for the trailer lights. To
connect the connector, do this:
1. Make sure the connector and the
socket are free of dirt, moisture,
or other foreign material.
1. Remove the socket cover, and
attach it securely over the socket.
2. Open the socket lid by pulling it up.
2. Insert the connector into the
socket securely to prevent
disconnection during operation.
CONTINUED
221
Driving
7-PIN TRAILER
CONNECTOR
7-PIN TRAILER CONNECTOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Towing a Trailer
To disconnect the connectors,
reverse the connection steps, then
make sure the socket lid and
socket cover are securely in place.
Avoid using excessive force when
disconnecting the connectors.
Important Precautions
Before you submerge the trailer
hitch in water (such as at a boat
ramp), make sure the connectors
are removed and the socket lid
and socket cover are securely in
place. Failure to do this will result
in electrical system problems.
After the connectors are
submerged in water, open the
socket lid and the socket cover to
drain them.
222
Electric current flows through the
electrical supply circuit only when
the ignition switch is in the ON
(II) position.
Using the electrical supply circuit
when the engine is at a stop or
idling can discharge the battery.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Towing a Trailer
Trailer Connector Sockets
+B
CHARGE
(BLACK)
RIGHT
TURN/
STOP
(BROWN)
SMALL
LIGHT
(GREEN)
LEFT
TURN/
STOP
(RED)
BACK LIGHT
(YELLOW)
7-PIN TRAILER SOCKET
ELECTRIC
BRAKE
(BLUE)
Refer to the above illustrations for
wiring information.
GROUND
(WHITE)
SMALL LIGHTS
(BROWN)
LEFT TURN/
STOP
(YELLOW)
4-PIN TRAILER SOCKET
RIGHT TURN/
STOP
(GREEN)
GROUND
(BLACK)
ELECTRIC BRAKE
(BROWN/WHITE)
BRAKE LIGHTS
(WHITE/BLACK)
BRAKE
(20A)
(WHITE)
The trailer jumper harness is used to
install the controller for the electric
trailer brakes. For more information,
see Trailer Brakes on page 217 .
223
Driving
GROUND
(WHITE)
Trailer Jumper Harness
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Towing a Trailer
Pre-Tow Checklist
When preparing to tow, and before
driving away, be sure to check the
following:
The vehicle has been properly
serviced, and the tires, brakes,
suspension, cooling system, and
lights are in good operating
condition.
The trailer has been properly
serviced and is in good condition.
All weights and loads are within
limits.
The hitch, safety chains, and any
other attachments are secure.
All items on and in the trailer are
properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.
224
Your vehicle tires and spare are in
good condition and properly
inflated.
The trailer tires and spare are in
good condition and inflated as
recommended by the trailer
maker.
Towing performance can be
affected by high altitude, high
temperature, or when climbing
steep grades. Therefore, premium
fuel (premium unleaded gasoline
with pump octane number of 91 or
higher) is recommended when
towing more than 3,500 lbs (1,590
kg).
Driving Safely With a Trailer
The added weight, length, and
height of a trailer will affect your
vehicle’s handling and performance,
so driving with a trailer requires
some special driving skills and
techniques.
For your safety and the safety of
others, take time to practice driving
maneuvers before heading for the
open road, and follow the guidelines
below.
Break-In Period
Avoid towing a trailer during your
vehicle’s first 600 miles (1,000 km).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Towing a Trailer
Towing Speeds and Gears
Making Turns and Braking
Drive slower than normal in all
driving situations, and obey posted
speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
When towing a fixed-sided trailer
(e.g., camper), do not exceed 55 mph
(88 km/h). At higher speeds, the
trailer may sway or affect vehicle
handling.
Make turns more slowly and wider
than normal. The trailer tracks a
smaller arc than your vehicle, and it
can hit or run over something the
vehicle misses.
With heavy cargo on the pickup bed,
your vehicle has a higher center of
gravity. Drive more slowly and
cautiously. Loading heavy cargo
could affect your vehicle’s handling
and performance.
When driving down hills, reduce
your speed, and use D3. Do not
‘‘ride’’ the brakes. Remember, it
takes longer to slow down and
stop when towing a trailer.
Driving on Hills
When climbing hills, closely watch
your temperature gauge. If it nears
the red (Hot) mark, turn the air
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if
necessary, pull to the side of the
road to let the engine cool.
Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting
Crosswinds and air turbulence
caused by passing trucks can disrupt
your steering and cause trailer to
sway. When being passed by a large
vehicle, keep a constant speed, and
steer straight ahead. Do not try to
make quick steering or braking
corrections.
CONTINUED
225
Driving
When towing a trailer on level roads
under normal driving conditions, do
not use D3. This will increase the
automatic transmission fluid
temperature and may cause
overheating.
Allow more time and distance for
braking. Do not brake or turn
suddenly as this could cause the
trailer to jackknife or turn over.
If you must stop when facing uphill,
use the foot brake or parking brake.
Do not try to hold the vehicle in
place by pressing on the accelerator,
as this can cause the automatic
transmission to overheat.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Towing a Trailer
Backing Up
Always drive slowly and have
someone guide you when backing up.
Grip the bottom of the steering wheel,
then turn the wheel to the left to get
the trailer to move to the left. Turn
the wheel to the right to move the
trailer to the right.
Parking
When parking on level ground,
follow all normal precautions (see
page 206 ) including putting the
transmission in Park, and firmly
setting the parking brake.
Do not park on an incline unless it is
unavoidable. If you must park on an
incline, follow the steps below to
help prevent the vehicle and trailer
from rolling and possibly injuring
someone.
226
1. Turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill, and away from
the curb on an uphill.
2. With the foot brake fully pressed,
have someone place wheel chocks
on the downhill side of the vehicle
and trailer wheels.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake
before you put the transmission in
Park. This keeps the vehicle from
putting pressure on the parking
mechanism in the transmission. It
also makes it easier to move the
shift lever out of Park when you
want to drive away.
Retrieving a Boat
If the vehicle’s tires slip when
retrieving a boat from the water,
shift to first gear, and turn on VTM-4
lock (see page 203 ). Disengage
VTM-4 lock as soon as the boat is
out of the water to prevent damage
to the VTM-4 system.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
General Information
Your vehicle has been designed
primarily for use on pavement. But
its higher ground clearance and fourwheel drive VTM-4 system allow you
to occasionally travel on unpaved
roads and surfaces. Your vehicle is
not designed for trailblazing,
mountain climbing, or other
challenging off-road activities.
If you decide to drive on unpaved
roads, you will find that it requires
somewhat different driving skills.
Your vehicle will also handle
somewhat differently than it does on
pavement. Be sure to pay extra
attention to the precautions and tips
in this section, and get acquainted
with your vehicle before leaving the
pavement.
Improperly operating this
vehicle on or off-pavement can
cause an accident or rollover in
which you and your passengers
could be seriously injured or
killed.
Driving
Follow all instructions and
guidelines in this owner’s
manual.
Keep your speed low, and
don’t drive faster than
conditions permit.
227
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
Important Safety Precautions
To avoid loss of control or rollover,
be sure to follow all precautions and
recommendations.
Be sure to store cargo properly
and do not exceed your cargo load
limits (see page 187 and 212 ).
Be aware that a heavy load can
reduce ground clearance and your
ability to clear obstacles.
Whenever you drive, make sure
you and your passengers always
wear seat belts.
Keep your speed low, and never
go faster than the conditions allow.
It’s up to you to continually assess
the situation and drive within the
limits.
228
Remember
The route presents limits (too steep
or bumpy roads). You have limits
(driving skill and comfort). And your
vehicle has limits (traction, stability,
and power).
Driving off-highway can be
hazardous if you fail to recognize
limits and take the proper
precautions.
Check Out Your Vehicle
Before you leave the pavement, be
sure to do all scheduled maintenance
and service, and inspect your vehicle
for any problems. Pay special
attention to the condition of the tires,
and check the tire pressures.
After you return to the pavement,
carefully inspect your vehicle to
make sure there is no damage that
could make driving it unsafe.
Recheck the condition of the tires
and the tire pressures.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
Accelerating and Braking
For better traction on all surfaces,
accelerate slowly and gradually build
up speed. If you try to start too fast
on wet soil, mud, snow, or ice, you
might not have enough traction to
get underway, and you may dig
yourself a hole. Starting with the
shift lever in second (2) gear will
help you have a smoother start on
snow or ice.
Because your vehicle has a higher
center of gravity than a conventional
passenger vehicle, driving a wheel
over a tall object, or allowing a wheel
to drop into a deep hole, can cause
your vehicle to tip or roll over.
Driving on Slopes
If you can’t clearly see all conditions
or obstacles on a slope, walk the
slope before you drive on it. If you
have any doubt whether or not you
can safely drive on the slope, don’t
do it. Find another route.
If you are driving up a hill and find
that you cannot continue, do not try to
turn around. Your vehicle could roll
over. Slowly back down the hill,
following the same route you took up
the hill.
229
Driving
Keep in mind that you will usually
need more time and distance to
brake to a stop on unpaved surfaces.
Avoid hard braking. Do not ‘‘pump’’
the brakes; let the anti-lock braking
system pump them for you.
Avoiding Obstacles
Your vehicle is not equipped with
undercarriage guards to protect key
components, so take care to avoid
rocks, tree stumps, and other
obstacles in your path.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
Crossing a Stream
Before driving through water, stop,
get out if necessary, and make sure
that:
The water is not deep enough to
cover your wheel hubs, axles, or
exhaust pipe. You could stall and
not be able to restart your engine.
The water can also damage
important vehicle components.
The banks are sloped so you can
drive out.
The water is not flowing too fast.
Deep rushing water can sweep you
downstream. Even very shallow
rushing water can wash the
ground from under your tires and
cause you to lose traction and
possibly roll over.
230
The banks and surface under the
water provide good traction. The
water may hide hazards such as
rocks, holes, or mud.
If you decide it is safe to drive
through water, choose a suitable
speed, and proceed without shifting,
changing speeds, stopping, or
shutting off the engine.
Do not try to cross water at high
speeds, as this may cause severe
damage to the cooling system or
result in loss of control.
After driving through water, test
your brakes. If they got wet, gently
‘‘pump’’ them while driving slowly
until they operate normally.
If the water is deeper than the wheel
hubs, some additional service may
be required. This service is not
covered by your warranties.
If You Get Stuck
If you get stuck, and cannot get
unstuck with the VTM-4 system,
engage the VTM-4 Lock (see page
203 ), and carefully try to go in the
direction (forward or reverse) that
you think will get you unstuck. Do
not spin the tires at high speeds. It
will not help you get out and may
cause damage to the transmission or
VTM-4 system.
If you are still unable to free yourself,
your vehicle is equipped with front
and rear tow hooks designed for this
purpose (see page 297 ).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
Use a nylon strap to attach your
vehicle to the recovery vehicle, and
carefully take out the slack in the
strap. Once the strap is tight, the
recovery vehicle should apply force.
Remember that the recovery vehicle
needs good traction to avoid
becoming stuck, too.
Do not exceed the trailer weight
or tongue limits (see page 214 ).
Stay on smooth, level dirt roads,
and avoid driving in hilly terrain.
Allow extra room for starting,
stopping, and turning.
Driving
You should never use a jack to try to
get unstuck. Your vehicle could
easily slip off the jack and hurt you
or someone else.
Towing a Trailer Off-Road
You may safely tow a trailer off-road
if you follow these guidelines:
Slow down if you encounter bumps
or other obstacles.
231
Main Menu
Main Menu
Maintenance
This section explains why it is
important to keep your vehicle well
maintained and how to follow basic
maintenance safety precautions.
This section also includes
instructions on how to read the
maintenance minder messages on
the information display, a
maintenance record, and instructions
for simple maintenance tasks you
may want to take care of yourself.
233
Maintenance
If you have the skills and tools to
perform more complex maintenance
tasks on your vehicle, you may want
to purchase the service manual. See
page 315 for information on how to
obtain a copy, or see your dealer.
Maintenance Safety ....................... 234
Maintenance Minder ..................... 235
Maintenance Record ..................... 243
Fluid Locations............................... 245
Adding Engine Oil ......................... 246
Changing the Engine Oil and
Filter ............................................ 247
Engine Coolant ............................... 249
Windshield Washers ..................... 250
Automatic Transmission Fluid..... 251
Rear Differential Fluid .................. 252
Transfer Assembly Fluid .............. 253
Brake Fluid ..................................... 253
Power Steering Fluid ..................... 254
Timing Belt ..................................... 254
Lights .............................................. 255
Cleaning the Seat Belts ................. 261
Floor Mats ...................................... 261
Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 262
Wiper Blades .................................. 262
Wheels ............................................ 264
Tires ................................................ 265
Checking the Battery .................... 270
Vehicle Storage .............................. 272
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Safety
All service items not detailed in this
section should be performed by a
certified technician or other qualified
mechanic.
Important Safety Precautions
To eliminate potential hazards, read
the instructions before you begin,
and make sure you have the tools
and skills required.
Make sure your vehicle is parked
on level ground, the parking brake
is set, and the engine is off.
To clean parts, use a commercially
available degreaser or parts
cleaner, not gasoline.
To reduce the possibility of fire or
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,
and flames away from the battery
and all fuel-related parts.
Wear eye protection and
protective clothing when working
with the battery or compressed air.
234
Improperly maintaining this
vehicle, or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection
and maintenance
recommendations and
schedules in this owner’s
manual.
Potential Vehicle Hazards
Carbon Monoxide poison from
engine exhaust. Be sure there is
adequate ventilation whenever you
operate the engine.
Burns from hot parts. Let the
engine and exhaust system cool
down before touching any parts.
Injury from moving parts. Do
not run the engine unless
instructed to do so.
Failure to properly follow
maintenance instructions and
precautions can cause you to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures
and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
Some of the most important safety
precautions are given here. However,
we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Minder
Your vehicle displays engine oil life
and maintenance service items on
the information display to show you
when you should have your dealer do
engine oil replacement and indicated
maintenance service.
Based on the engine operating
conditions and accumulated engine
revolutions, the onboard computer in
your vehicle calculates the remaining
engine oil life and displays it as a
percentage.
Engine Oil Life Display
ENGINE OIL LIFE
DISPLAY
MAINTENANCE MINDER
INDICATOR
Calculated Engine
Oil Life (%)
100 %−91 %
90 %−81 %
80 %−71 %
70 %−61 %
60 %−51 %
50 %−41 %
40 %−31 %
30 %−21 %
20 %−16 %
15 %−11 %
10 %−6 %
5 %−1 %
0%
Displayed
Engine Oil Life (%)
100 %
90 %
80 %
70 %
60 %
50 %
40 %
30 %
20 %
15 %
10 %
5%
0%
CONTINUED
235
Maintenance
To see the current engine oil life,
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and press the SELECT
button repeatedly until the engine oil
life display appears (see page 70 ).
The remaining engine oil life is
displayed on the engine oil life
display according to the table shown
below.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Minder
The message changes between
SERVICE and dUE SOON
repeatedly.
MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM
MESSAGE
MAINTENANCE ITEM CODES
If the engine oil life is 15 percent or
less, you will see ‘‘SERVICE dUE
SOON’’ message in the information
display every time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. The maintenance minder
indicator will also come on, and the
maintenance item code(s) for other
scheduled maintenance items
needing service will be displayed
below the message.
236
MESSAGE
MAINTENANCE SUB ITEMS
The maintenance item code(s)
indicate the main and sub items
required at the time of the oil change
(see page 242 ).
MAINTENANCE ITEM CODES
When the remaining engine oil life is
less than 5 percent, you will see a
‘‘SERVICE dUE NOW’’ message
along with the same maintenance
item code(s), every time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
The message changes between
SERVICE and dUE NOW repeatedly.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Minder
When you see this message, have
the indicated maintenance
performed by your dealer as soon as
possible.
U.S.
NEGATIVE MILEAGE
Canada
NEGATIVE MILEAGE
The message changes between
SERVICE and PAST dUE repeatedly.
If you still do not perform the
indicated maintenance, you will see a
negative mileage, for example ‘‘34
MI (54 KM)’’ with the message
‘‘PAST dUE.’’ This negative mileage
means that you should have
performed the indicated
maintenance 34 miles (54
kilometers) ago. Immediately have
the indicated maintenance
performed, and make sure to reset
the display as described on page 238 .
CONTINUED
237
Maintenance
When the remaining engine oil life is
0 percent, you will see ‘‘SERVICE
PAST dUE’’ message every time you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Minder
You can change the display to the
engine oil life display, or the
odometer and trip meter by pushing
the SELECT button on the
instrument panel.
Maintenance Main Items and Sub
Items
MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM
MAINTENANCE SUB ITEMS
All maintenance items displayed in
the trip meter are in code. For an
explanation of these maintenance
codes, see page 242 .
238
Resetting the Engine Oil Life
Display
Your dealer will reset the display
after completing the required
maintenance service. You will see
‘‘OIL LIFE 100 %’’ on the information
display the next time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If maintenance service is done by
someone other than your dealer,
reset the maintenance minder as
follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
2. Press the SELECT button
repeatedly until the engine oil life
display or the service message is
displayed.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Minder
NO is shown.
4. Select the appropriate answer,
‘‘MAINT RESET >N’’ (NO) or
‘‘MAINT RESET >Y’’ (YES) by
pressing the SELECT button.
‘‘>N’’ or ‘‘>Y’’ is displayed on the
outside temperature display.
5. Select the ‘‘MAINT RESET >Y’’
(YES), and press and hold the
RESET button again to reset the
engine oil life to ‘‘100.’’
239
Maintenance
3. Press the RESET button for about
10 seconds. You will see a
‘‘MAINT RESET’’ message.
YES is shown.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Minder
Important Maintenance
Precautions
If you have the required service
done but do not reset the display, or
reset the display without doing the
service, the system will not show the
proper maintenance intervals. This
can lead to serious mechanical
problems because you will no longer
have an accurate record of when
maintenance is needed.
Your authorized Honda dealer
knows your vehicle best and can
provide competent, efficient service.
However, service at a dealer is not
mandatory to keep your warranties
in effect. Maintenance may be done
by any qualified service facility or
person who is skilled in this type of
automotive service. Make sure to
have the service facility or person
reset the display as previously
described. Keep all receipts as proof
of completion, and have the person
who does the work fill out the
maintenance record. Check your
warranty booklet for more
information.
We recommend the use of Honda
parts and fluids whenever you have
maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same highquality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.
240
U.S. Vehicles:
Maintenance, replacement, or
repair of emissions control
devices and systems may be done
by any automotive repair
establishment or individual using
parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA
standards.
According to state and federal
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked
with # will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all
maintenance services should be
performed in accordance with the
intervals indicated by the
information display.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Minder
Owner’s Maintenance Checks
You should check the following
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform
any check, turn to the appropriate
page listed.
Lights − Check the operation of
the headlights, parking lights,
taillights, high-mount brake light,
and license plate lights monthly.
See page 255 .
Engine oil level − Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
page 182 .
Maintenance
Engine coolant level − Check the
radiator reserve tank every time
you fill the fuel tank. See page 182 .
Automatic transmission − Check
the fluid level monthly. See page
251 .
Brakes − Check the fluid level
monthly. See page 253 .
Tires − Check the tire pressure
monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
265 .
CONTINUED
241
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance Minder
Symbol
A
B
*1 :
Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil*1
Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect these items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system#
Fuel lines and connections#
If the message ‘‚SERVICE DUE NOW’’ does not appear more than 12 months
after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
Symbol
2
3
4
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page 240 .
NOTE:
Symbol
1
2
242
Independent of the maintenance messages in the information display,
replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.
Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires
Replace air cleaner element
If you drive in dusty conditions, replace
every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
5
6
Maintenance Sub Items
Replace dust and pollen filter
If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high
concentrations of soot in the air from industry and from dieselpowered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Inspect drive belt
Replace transmission and transfer fluid
Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or
trailer towing results in higher transmission and transfer
temperatures or frequently fully loaded. This requires
transmission and transfer fluid changes more frequently
than recommended by the Maintenance Minder.
If you regulary drive your vehicle under these conditions, have
the transmission and transfer fluid changed every 30,000 miles
(48,000 km).
Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over 110°F,
43°C), in very low temperatures (under-20°F, -29°C), or towing a
trailer, replace every 60,000 mile (U.S.)/100,000 km (Canada)
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant
Replace VTM-4 rear differential fluid
Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or
trailer towing results in higher level of mechanical (shear) stress
to fluid or frequently fully loaded. This requires differential fluid
changes more frequently than recommended by the
Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under
these conditions, have the differential fluid changed at
7,500 miles (12,000 km), then every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Record
You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here. When maintenance is performed, record the mileage, circle the coded item(s)
completed, and write in any other non-coded items (such as brake fluid replacement) below the codes. Keep the receipts for all work done on your
vehicle. Maintenance can also be recorded in your Honda service history booklet.
Mileage
Maintenance
Performed
Signature
Mileage
Maintenance
Performed
Signature
Date
Date
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
Maintenance
mi
km
CONTINUED
243
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Record
Mileage
Maintenance
Performed
Signature
Mileage
Maintenance
Performed
Signature
Date
244
Date
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
mi
km
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fluid Locations
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
(Orange loop)
BRAKE FLUID
(Gray cap)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
Maintenance
ENGINE
COOLANT
RESERVOIR
POWER STEERING
FLUID (Red cap)*
*: Under the gray cover
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
RADIATOR CAP
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
245
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Adding Engine Oil
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
Unscrew and remove the engine oil
fill cap on the valve cover. Pour in
the oil slowly and carefully so you do
not spill any. Clean up any spills
immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment. Reinstall the engine
oil fill cap, and tighten it securely.
Wait a few minutes, and recheck the
oil level on the engine oil dipstick.
Do not fill above the upper mark; you
could damage the engine.
Recommended Engine Oil
Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade 5W-20
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Honda Motor Oil is the preferred
5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is
highly recommended that you use
Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for
optimum engine protection. Make
sure the API Certification Seal says
‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’
The oil viscosity or weight is
provided on the container’s label.
5W-20 oil is formulated for yearround protection of your vehicle to
improve cold weather starting and
fuel economy.
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
Ambient Temperature
246
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
Changing the Engine Oil and
Filter
Always change the oil and filter
according to the maintenance
messages shown on the odometer
and trip meter display. The oil and
filter collect contaminants that can
damage your engine if they are not
removed regularly.
Engine Oil Additives
Your vehicle does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely
affect the engine or transmission
performance and durability.
Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service stationtype hydraulic lift for this service.
Unless you have the knowledge and
proper equipment, you should have
this maintenance done by a skilled
mechanic.
WASHER
DRAIN BOLT
2. Open the hood, and remove the
engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.
1. Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
CONTINUED
247
Maintenance
Synthetic Oil
You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
given for a conventional motor oil: it
displays the API Certification Seal,
and it is the proper weight. You must
follow the oil and filter change
intervals shown on the information
display.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
OIL FILTER
5. Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten the drain bolt to:
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
9. Turn off the engine and let it sit
for several minutes, then check
the oil level on the dipstick. If
necessary, add more oil.
6. Refill the engine with the recommended oil.
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
3. Remove the oil filter, and let the
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your
dealer) is required.
Make sure the oil filter gasket is
not stuck to the engine block. If it
is, remove it before installing a
new oil filter.
4. Install a new oil filter according to
the instructions that come with it.
248
7. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator should go out within 5
seconds. If it does not, turn off the
engine, and check your work.
8. Let the engine run for several
minutes, then check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
Improper disposal of engine oil can be
harmf ul to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container, and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Engine Coolant
Adding Engine Coolant
RESERVE TANK
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not
available, you may use another
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Make sure it
is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda
coolant can result in corrosion,
causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
If the reserve tank is completely
empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
Maintenance
If the coolant level in the reserve
tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Always use Honda Long-life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant
is pre-mixed with 50 percent
antifreeze and 50 percent water.
Never add straight antifreeze or
plain water.
CONTINUED
249
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Engine Coolant, Windshield Washers
3. The coolant level should be up to
the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
1. Make sure the engine and radiator
are cool.
When the radiator and engine are
cool, relieve any pressure in the
cooling system by turning the
radiator cap counterclockwise,
without pressing down.
2. Remove the radiator cap by
pushing down and turning
counterclockwise.
250
Windshield Washers
Check the fluid level in the
windshield washer reservoir at least
monthly during normal use.
Pour the coolant slowly and
carefully so you do not spill any.
Clean up any spill immediately; it
could damage components in the
engine compartment.
The washer level indicator will come
on when the level is low (see page
65 ).
4. Put the radiator cap back on, and
tighten it fully.
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
5. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition them.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Windshield Washers, Automatic Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Do not use engine antif reeze or a
vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze
can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
a vinegar/water solution can damage
the windshield washer pump. Use only
commercially-available windshield
washer f luid.
DIPSTICK
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
DIPSTICK
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
Start the engine and let it run until
the radiator fan comes on, then
shut off the engine. For accurate
results, wait about 60 seconds
before going to step 2, but do not
wait longer than 90 seconds.
2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission, and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
3. Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
4. Remove the dipstick and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
CONTINUED
marks.
251
Maintenance
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Automatic transmission Fluid, Rear Differential Fluid
5. If the level is below the lower
mark, remove the fill plug, then
add the fluid into the hole to bring
it to the level between the upper
and lower marks.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any
spill immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
compartment.
Always use Honda ATF-Z1
(automatic transmission fluid). If it’s
not available, you may use a
DEXRON III automatic
transmission fluid as a temporary
replacement. However, continued
use can affect the shift quality. Have
the transmission flushed and refilled
with Honda ATF-Z1 by your dealer
as soon as it is convenient.
252
6. Insert the dipstick all the way back
in the transmission.
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
contact your dealer.
Rear Differential Fluid
The rear differential should be
drained and refilled with new fluid
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the
information display. This service
may be needed more often under
certain driving conditions (see page
242 ).
Always use Honda VTM-4
Differential Fluid, and have your
dealer replace the rear differential
fluid.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Transfer Assembly Fluid, Brake Fluid
Transfer Assembly Fluid
The transfer assembly should be
drained and refilled with new fluid
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the
information display.
Brake Fluid
Check the brake fluid level in the
reservoir monthly.
Replace the brake fluid according to
the time recommendation in the
maintenance minder schedule.
Always use Hypoid gear oil GL4 or
GL5 with a viscosity of SAE 90 or
80W-90, and have your dealer
replace the transfer assembly fluid.
Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement.
MIN
The fluid level should be between
the MIN and MAX marks on the side
of the reservoir. If the level is at or
below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
compatible with your vehicle’s
braking system and can cause
extensive damage.
253
Maintenance
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can
cause corrosion and decrease the life
of the system. Have the brake
system flushed and refilled with
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 as soon as possible.
MAX
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Power Steering Fluid, Timing Belt
Power Steering Fluid
COVER
UPPER LEVEL
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any
spill immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
compartment.
Always use Honda Power Steering
Fluid. You may use another power
steering fluid as an emergency
replacement, but have the power
steering system flushed and refilled
with Honda PSF as soon as possible.
LOWER LEVEL
Remove the cover, then check the
level on the side of the reservoir
when the engine is cold.
The fluid should be between the
UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.
If not, add power steering fluid to the
UPPER LEVEL mark, and put the
cover back in place.
254
A low power steering fluid level can
indicate a leak in the system. Check
the fluid level frequently, and have
the system inspected as soon as
possible.
Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t
or right lock and holding it there can
damage the power steering pump.
Timing Belt
The timing belt should be replaced
at the intervals shown in the
maintenance minder schedule.
Replace the belt at 60,000 miles (U.S.)
or 100,000 km (Canada) if you
regularly drive your vehicle in one or
more of these conditions:
In very high temperatures
(over 110°F, 43°C).
In very low temperatures
(under −20°F, −29°C).
Towing a trailer.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lights
Headlight Aiming
The headlights were properly aimed
when your vehicle was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items on the
pickup bed or pull a trailer,
readjustment may be required.
Adjustments should be done by your
dealer or other qualified mechanic.
Replacing a Headlight Bulb
Your vehicle has halogen headlight
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its base, and protect the glass
from contact with your skin or hard
objects. If you touch the glass, clean
it with denatured alcohol and a clean
cloth.
WEATHER SEAL
HOLD-DOWN WIRE
BULB
1. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pulling the
connector straight back.
2. Remove the rubber weather seal
by pulling on the tab.
3. Unclip the end of the hold-down
wire from its slot. Pivot it out of
the way, and remove the bulb.
CONTINUED
255
Maintenance
Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
CONNECTOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lights
4. Install the new bulb into the hole,
making sure the tabs are in their
slots. Pivot the hold-down wire
back in place, and clip the end into
the slot.
5. Install the rubber weather seal
over the back of the headlight
assembly. Make sure it is right
side up.
Replacing a Front Turn Signal/
Hazard/Parking Light Bulb
1. To change the passenger’s side
bulb, start the engine, turn the
steering wheel all the way to the
left, and turn off the engine. To
change the driver’s side bulb, turn
the steering wheel to the right.
HOLDING CLIPS
6. Push the electrical connector onto
the new bulb. Make sure it is
connected securely. Turn on the
headlights to test the new bulb.
3. Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
4. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
2. Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to
remove the two holding clips from
the inner fender, and pull the inner
fender cover back.
256
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lights
5. Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
Replacing Rear Bulbs
6. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
7. Put the inner fender cover in place.
Install and lock each holding clip
by pushing on the center.
2. Remove the two bolts, and remove
the rear light assembly from the
rear pillar.
4. Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
5. Remove the burned-out bulb by
pulling it straight out of the socket.
3. Determine which of the three
bulbs is burned out: brake/
taillight, turn signal/hazard light,
or back-up light.
CONTINUED
257
Maintenance
1. Drop open the tailgate.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lights
6. Install the new bulb into the
socket.
Replacing a High-mount Brake
Light Bulb
7. Push the socket into the light
assembly, and turn it clockwise
until it locks.
8. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
9. Install the rear light assembly in
the rear pillar. Tighten the two
bolts securely.
LENS SEGMENT
1. Place a cloth on the edge of the
lens segment. Remove each lens
segment by carefully prying on its
edge with a small flat-tipped
screwdriver.
4. Remove the three mounting
screws from the light assembly.
2. Remove the screw under each lens.
6. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
3. Pull the high-mount brake light
assembly out of the vehicle.
258
5. Remove the lens from the light
assembly.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lights
7. Put the lens back on the light
assembly, and tighten the
mounting bolts securely.
Replacing a Rear License Plate
Bulb
8. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
9. Put the light assembly back into
the vehicle. Install the screws and
tighten them securely.
Reinstall the lens segments.
2. Remove the socket from the light
assembly by turning it one-quarter
turn counterclockwise.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
4. Push the socket into the light
assembly, and turn it clockwise
until it locks.
CONTINUED
259
Maintenance
1. Remove the license plate light
assembly by pulling it towards you,
and then pulling the front edge
upward.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lights
5. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Replacing a Bed Light Bulb
6. Reinstall the light assembly in the
bumper.
1. Remove the mounting screw from
the bed light assembly.
4. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
2. Pull out the light assembly.
3. Remove the socket from the light
assembly by turning it one-quarter
turn counterclockwise.
260
5. Push the socket into the light
assembly, and turn it clockwise
until it locks.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lights, Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats
6. Reinstall the light assembly.
7. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Cleaning the Seat Belts
Floor Mats
LOOP
8. Reinstall the mounting screw, and
tighten it securely.
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat
belt anchors can cause the belts to
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
The floor mats that came with your
vehicle hook over floor mat anchors.
This keeps the floor mats from
sliding forward or backward and
possibly interfering with the pedals
or making the front passenger’s
weight sensors ineffective.
If you remove a floor mat, make sure
to re-anchor it when you put it back
in your vehicle.
CONTINUED
261
Maintenance
If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft
brush with a mixture of mild soap
and warm water to clean them. Do
not use bleach, dye, or cleaning
solvents. Let the belts air-dry before
you use the vehicle.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Floor Mats, Dust and Pollen Filter, Wiper Blades
A non-Honda floor mat may not fit
your vehicle properly. This could
prevent the proper operation of the
folding rear seats and the passenger’s
seat weight sensors. We recommend
using genuine Honda floor mats. Do
not put additional floor mats on top
of the anchored mats.
262
Dust and Pollen Filter
This filter removes the dust and
pollen that is brought in from the
outside through the heating and
cooling system/climate control
system.
Have your dealer replace this filter
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the
information display. It should be
replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000
km) if you drive primarily in urban
areas that have high concentrations
of soot in the air, or if the air flow
from the heating and cooling
system/climate control system
becomes less than usual.
Wiper Blades
Check the condition of the wiper
blades at least every six months.
Replace them if you find signs of
cracking in the rubber, areas that are
getting hard, or if they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.
To replace a wiper blade:
1. To raise the wiper arm, turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position and activate the wipers
(see page 75 ). When the wipers
are in the upright position, turn
the ignition switch off to stop the
wipers in that position.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Wiper Blades
WIPER ARMS
BLADE
LOCK TAB
3. Disconnect the blade assembly
from the wiper arm by pushing in
the lock tab. Hold the lock tab in
while you push the blade assembly
toward the base of the arm.
4. Remove the blade from its holder
by grabbing the tabbed end of the
blade. Pull up firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.
Do not open the hood when the wiper
arms are raised, or you will damage the
hood and the wiper arms.
CONTINUED
263
Maintenance
2. Raise the wiper arm off the
windshield.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Wiper Blades, Wheels
BLADE
6. Slide the new wiper blade into the
holder until the tabs lock.
7. Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
Wheels
Clean the wheels as you would the
rest of the exterior. Wash them with
the same solution, and rinse them
thoroughly.
If equipped
8. Lower the wiper arm against the
window.
REINFORCEMENT
5. Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
264
9. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and turn the wiper
switch off to return the wiper arms
to the parked position.
Aluminum alloy wheels have a
protective clear-coat that keeps
the aluminum from corroding and
tarnishing. Cleaning the wheels
with harsh chemicals (including
some commercial wheel cleaners)
or a stiff brush can damage the
clear-coat. To clean the wheels,
use a mild detergent and a soft
brush or sponge.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your
tires must be the proper type and
size, in good condition with adequate
tread, and correctly inflated.
The following pages give more
detailed information on how to take
care of your tires and what to do
when they need to be replaced.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding tire
inflation and maintenance.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel
economy, and are more likely to
fail from being overheated.
Overinflated tires can make your
vehicle ride more harshly, are
more prone to damage from road
hazards, and wear unevenly.
The tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) warns you when a tire
pressure is low. See page 204 for
more information.
Even though your vehicle is
equipped with TPMS, we
recommend that you visually check
your tires every day. If you think a
tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
Use a gauge to measure the air
pressure in each tire at least once a
month. Even tires that are in good
condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per
month. Remember to check the
spare tire at the same time.
Check the air pressures when the
tires are cold. This means the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km). Add or release air, if needed, to
match the recommended cold tire
pressures on page 266 .
CONTINUED
265
Maintenance
Using tires that are excessively
worn or improperly inflated can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Inflation Guidelines
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best combination of
handling, tread life, and riding
comfort.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Tires
If you check air pressures when the
tires are hot [driven for several miles
(kilometers)], you will see readings 4
to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4
kgf/cm ) higher than the cold
readings. This is normal. Do not let
air out to match the recommended
cold air pressure. The tire will be
underinflated.
You should get your own tire
pressure gauge and use it whenever
you check your tire pressures. This
will make it easier for you to tell if a
pressure loss is due to a tire problem
and not due to a variation between
gauges.
While tubeless tires have some
ability to self-seal if they are
punctured, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.
Never use a puncture-repairing agent
in a flat tire. If used, you will have to
replace the tire pressure sensor.
Have the flat tire repaired by your
dealer as soon as possible.
Recommended Tire Pressures
The following chart shows the
recommended cold tire pressures for
most normal and high-speed driving
conditions.
Tire Size
P245/65R17 105S
Compact Spare
T165/90R17 105M
Cold Tire Pressure
Front/Rear:
32 psi (220 kPa ,
2.2 kgf/cm )
60 psi (420 kPa ,
4.2 kgf/cm )
For convenience, the recommended
tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
For additional information about
your tires, see page 306 .
266
Tire Inspection
Every time you check inflation, you
should also examine the tires for
damage, foreign objects, and wear.
You should look for:
Bumps or bulges in the tread or
side of the tire. Replace the tire if
you find either of these conditions.
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
of the tire. Replace the tire if you
can see fabric or cord.
Excessive tread wear.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Tires
INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS
TREAD WEAR INDICATORS
A tire this worn gives very little
traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tire if you can see three
or more tread wear indicators.
Have your dealer check the tires if
you feel a consistent vibration while
driving. A tire should always be
rebalanced if it is removed from the
wheel. When you have new tires
installed, make sure they are
balanced. This increases riding
comfort and tire life. For best results,
have the installer perform a dynamic
balance.
On vehicles with aluminum wheels,
improper wheel weights can damage
your vehicle’s wheels. Use only Honda
wheel weights f or balancing.
Tire Rotation
Front
Front
(For Non-directional (For Directional
Tires and Wheels) Tires and Wheels)
To help increase tire life and
distribute wear more evenly, rotate
the tires according to the
maintenance messages displayed on
the information display. Move the
tires to the positions shown in the
diagram each time they are rotated.
If you purchase directional tires,
rotate only front-to-back.
267
Maintenance
Your tires have wear indicators
molded into the tread. When the
tread wears down, you will see a
band 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide band
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
left on the tire.
Tire Maintenance
In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Tires
Replacing Tires and Wheels
Replace your tires with radial tires of
the same size, load range, speed
rating, and maximum cold tire
pressure rating (as shown on the
tire’s sidewall).
It is best to replace all four tires at
the same time. If that is not possible
or necessary, replace the two front
tires or two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling.
Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on
your vehicle can reduce braking
ability, traction, and steering
accuracy. Using tires of a different
size or construction can cause the
ABS and vehicle stability assist
system (VSA) to work inconsistently.
If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications
match those of the original wheels.
The ABS works by comparing the
speed of the wheels. When replacing
tires, use the same size originally
supplied with the vehicle. Tire size
and construction can affect wheel
speed and may cause the system to
activate.
268
Also be sure you use only TPMS
specific wheels. If you do not, the
tire pressure monitoring system will
not work on that tire.
Replacement wheels are available at
your dealer.
Installing improper tires on your
vehicle can affect handling and
stability. This can cause a crash
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Tires
Wheel and Tire Specifications
Wheels:
17 x 7 1/2 J
Tires:
P245/65R17 105S
See page 304 for DOT tire quality
grading information, and page
306 for tire size information.
For the best performance in snowy
or icy conditions, you should install
snow tires or tire chains. They may
be required by local laws under
certain conditions.
Tire Chains
Mount tire chains on your tires when
required by driving conditions or
local laws. Install them only on the
front tires. Do not use chains on the
rear tires.
Because your vehicle has limited tire
clearance, we strongly recommend
using this Quality Chain Corp. tire
chain:
Premium Cobra Cable Chain
#1046P with accessory
adjusters*
This tire chain is available at many
auto supply stores. To find a local
store that carries the chain, call
Quality Chain Corp at 1-800-843-8824.
To order the tire chain online, go to
www.chainquest.com, and enter your
vehicle information. When you install
the chains, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions, and mount them as
tightly as you can. Drive slowly with
the chains installed.
*
Rubber chain adjusters, or
tensioners, must be used to
prevent the chains from
contacting the body or the chassis.
CONTINUED
269
Maintenance
Winter Driving
Tires marked ‘‘M + S’’ or ‘‘All
Season’’ on the sidewall have an allweather tread design suitable for
most winter driving conditions.
Snow Tires
If you mount snow tires on your
vehicle, make sure they are radial
tires of the same size and load range
as the original tires. Mount snow tires
on all four wheels. The traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
may be lower than your original tires.
Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Tires, Checking the Battery
Checking the Battery
Using the wrong chains, or not
properly installing chains, can
damage the brake lines and
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously injured or killed.
Traction devices that are the wrong
size or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
driving if they are hitting any part of
the vehicle.
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding the
selection and use of tire chains.
If you ever hear the chains
contacting the body or chassis, stop
and investigate. If the chains have
loosened, retighten them. Make sure
they do not contact the brake lines
or suspension.
Remove the chains as soon as you
begin driving on cleared roads.
270
Check the condition of the battery
monthly by looking at the test
indicator window. The label on the
battery explains the test indicator’s
colors.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Checking the Battery
Check the terminals for corrosion (a
white or yellowish powder). To
remove it, cover the terminals with a
solution of baking soda and water. It
will bubble up and turn brown. When
this stops, wash it off with plain
water. Dry off the battery with a
cloth or paper towel. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent
future corrosion.
WARNING: Battery posts,
terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, the audio
system will disable itself. The next
time you turn on the radio you will
see ‘‘CODE’’ in the frequency display.
Use the preset bars to enter the code
(see page 162 ).
The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
operation.
The navigation system will also
disable itself. The next time you turn
on the ignition switch, the system
will require you to enter a PIN
before it can be used. Refer to the
navigation system manual.
On vehicles with navigation system
A spark or flame can cause the
battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.
Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
technician do the battery
maintenance.
271
Maintenance
If additional battery maintenance is
needed, see your dealer or a
qualified technician.
If you need to connect the battery to
a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damaging your vehicle’s
electrical system. Always disconnect
the negative (−) cable first, and
reconnect it last.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Vehicle Storage
If you need to park your vehicle for
an extended period (more than 1
month), there are several things you
should do to prepare it for storage.
Proper preparation helps prevent
deterioration and makes it easier to
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors.
Block the rear wheels.
If the vehicle is to be stored for a
longer period, it should be
supported on jackstands so the
tires are off the ground.
Fill the fuel tank.
Leave one window open slightly (if
the vehicle is being stored
indoors).
Change the engine oil and filter.
Disconnect the battery.
Wash and dry the exterior
completely.
Support the front wiper blade
arms with a folded towel or rag so
they do not touch the windshield.
Clean the interior. Make sure the
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are
completely dry.
Leave the parking brake off. Put
the transmission in Park.
272
To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door,
In-Bed Trunk lid, and tailgate seals.
Also, apply a vehicle body wax to
the painted surfaces that mate
with the door, In-Bed Trunk lid
and tailgate seals.
Cover the vehicle with a
‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
from a porous material such as
cotton. Non-porous materials, such
as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
If possible, periodically run the
engine until it reaches full
operating temperature (the
cooling fans cycle on and off
twice). Preferably, do this once a
month.
Main Menu
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers the more
common problems that motorists
experience with their vehicles. It
gives you information about how to
safely evaluate the problem and what
to do to correct it. If the problem has
stranded you on the side of the road,
you may be able to get going again.
If not, you will also find instructions
on getting your vehicle towed.
Compact Spare Tire....................... 274
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 275
If the Engine Won’t Start .............. 283
Jump Starting ................................. 284
If the Engine Overheats ............... 286
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .......... 288
Charging System Indicator........... 288
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 289
Brake System Indicator ................ 290
Fuses ............................................... 291
Fuse Locations ............................... 294
Emergency Towing ....................... 296
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck ........... 297
Taking Care of the Unexpected
273
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Compact Spare Tire
Use the compact spare tire as a
temporary replacement only. Get
your regular tire repaired or replaced,
and put it back on your vehicle as
soon as you can.
Do not mount snow chains on a
compact spare.
Check the inflation pressure of the
compact spare tire every time you
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Do not use your compact spare
tire on another vehicle unless it is
the same make and model.
Follow these precautions:
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road
surfaces. Use greater caution
while driving.
274
INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
Do not use the compact spare tire
if you are towing a trailer.
Driving with the compact spare
tire may activate the TPMS (see
page 205 ). The TPMS does not
monitor compact spare tire
pressure.
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
Replace the tire when you can see
the tread wear indicator bars. The
replacement should be the same size
and design tire, mounted on the
same wheel. The spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
wheel, and the spare wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Changing a Flat Tire
If you have a flat tire while driving,
stop in a safe place to change it.
Drive slowly along the shoulder until
you get to an exit or an area to stop
that is far away from the traffic lanes.
The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.
If you tow a trailer frequently, we
recommend that you use a regular
tire as a spare. You can store the
regular size spare tire on the tire tray,
but store the tool kit at the side of
the In-Bed Trunk (see page 281 ),
and secure it.
TOOL BOX
SPARE TIRE
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and
non-slippery ground. Put the
transmission in Park. Apply the
parking brake.
If you are towing a trailer, unhitch
it.
2. Turn on the hazard warning lights,
and turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Have all
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.
CONTINUED
275
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the
jack.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Changing a Flat Tire
WING BOLT
TIRE TRAY HOLDING BOLTS TIRE
TRAY
3. Open the In-Bed Trunk.
4. Remove the two tire tray holding
bolts.
TOOL BOX
5. Pull out the tire tray with the
handle, and hook the rear of the
tire tray to the guides on the back
edge of the In-Bed Trunk.
STRAP
6. Unfasten the strap to remove the
tool box, and unscrew the wing
bolt.
7. Take out the compact spare tire.
If you are using a cargo net or a
cargo cover in the In-Bed Trunk,
remove it before pulling out the tire
tray.
276
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Changing a Flat Tire
JACKING POINT
8. Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn
with the wheel nut wrench.
10.Turn the dial at the bottom of the
jack clockwise until the top of the
jack contacts the jacking point.
Make sure the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.
CONTINUED
277
Taking Care of the Unexpected
9. Place the jack under the jacking
point nearest the tire you need to
change.
DIAL
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Changing a Flat Tire
CONNECTOR BUTTON
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
DIAL
HOOK
EXTENSION
STAY
11.Attach the stay to the extension,
then attach the wheel nut wrench
to the end of the extension.
Make sure the stay, the extension,
and the wheel nut wrench are
securely attached.
278
CONNECTOR BUTTON
12.Insert the hook at the end of the
stay into the opening on the dial at
the bottom of the jack.
13.Turn the jack dial (wheel nut
wrench) clockwise as shown to
raise the vehicle until the flat tire
is off the ground.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Changing a Flat Tire
16.Put on the spare tire. Put the
wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel nut wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten the
wheel nuts fully.
17.Lower the vehicle to the ground,
and remove the jack.
WHEEL CAP
RT/LX model is shown.
15.Before mounting the spare tire,
wipe any dirt off the mounting
surface of the wheel and hub with
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully; it may be hot from
driving.
On RT and Canadian LX models
The wheel cap cannot be removed
without first removing the wheel
nuts.
CONTINUED
279
Taking Care of the Unexpected
14.Remove the wheel nuts and the
wheel cap (on RT and Canadian
LX models) then remove the flat
tire. Handle the wheel nuts
carefully; they may be hot from
driving. Place the flat tire on the
ground with the outside surface
facing up.
BRAKE HUB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Changing a Flat Tire
23.Release the tire tray and slide it
back in place.
WING BOLT
24.Tighten the tire tray holding bolts
securely.
SPACER CONE
18.Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
94 lbf·ft (127 N·m , 13 kgf·m)
19.On RTX, RTS, RTL, and Canadian
EXL models
Remove the center cap from the
flat tire.
280
For normal For spare
tire
tire
20.Place the flat tire face up on the
tire tray.
21.Remove the spacer cone from the
wing bolt, turn it over, and put it
back on the bolt.
22.Secure the flat tire by screwing
the wing bolt back into its hole.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Changing a Flat Tire
TOOL BOX
Loose items can be thrown out
of the vehicle in a crash and
could seriously injure the
occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools
securely before driving.
25.Store the jack and the tools in the
tool box.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
26.When storing the flat tire, place
the tool box at the right side of the
In-Bed Trunk as shown.
27.Store the wheel cap or center cap
in the In-Bed Trunk. Make sure it
does not get scratched or
damaged.
28.Refer to Changing a Tire with
TPMS (see page 205 ).
281
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Changing a Flat Tire
If you remove the spare tire from the
pickup bed, reinstall the clip back
into its hole.
Securing a Spare Tire on the
Pickup Bed
SPACER CONE
WING BOLT
As a temporary mounting location,
you can secure a spare tire on the
pickup bed, if needed.
1. Remove the clip by pushing the
center of its top.
2. Remove the spare tire from the
tire tray (see page 276 ).
282
3. Place the spare tire on the pickup
bed as shown.
4. Place the spacer cone in the wheel
hub, and secure the spare tire to
the pickup bed with the wing bolt.
5. Store or secure the tool box.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the Engine Won’t Start
Diagnosing why the engine won’t
start falls into two areas, depending
on what you hear when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position:
You hear nothing, or almost
nothing. The engine’s starter
motor does not operate at all, or
operates very slowly.
Nothing Happens or the Starter
Motor Operates Very Slowly
When you turn the ignition switch to
the START (III) position, you do not
hear the normal noise of the engine
trying to start. You may hear a
clicking sound, a series of clicks, or
nothing at all.
Check these things:
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. Turn on the
headlights, and check their
brightness. If the headlights are
very dim or do not come on at all,
the battery is discharged. See
Jump Starting on page 284 .
Turn the ignition switch to the
START (III) position. If the
headlights do not dim, check the
condition of the fuses. If the fuses
are OK, there is probably
something wrong with the
electrical circuit for the ignition
switch or starter motor. You will
need a qualified technician to
determine the problem. See
Emergency Towing on page 296 .
If the headlights dim noticeably or
go out when you try to start the
engine, either the battery is
discharged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of
the battery and terminal connections (see page 270 ). You can
then try jump starting the vehicle
from a booster battery (see page
284 ).
The Starter Operates Normally
In this case, the starter motor’s
speed sounds normal, or even faster
than normal, when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position, but the engine does not run.
Are you using a properly coded
key? An improperly coded key will
cause the immobilizer system
indicator in the instrument panel
to blink rapidly (see page 81 ).
CONTINUED
283
Taking Care of the Unexpected
You can hear the starter motor
operating normally, or the starter
motor sounds like it is spinning
faster than normal, but the engine
does not start up and run.
Check the transmission interlock.
The transmission must be in Park
or neutral or the starter will not
operate.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the Engine Won’t Start, Jump Starting
Are you using the proper starting
procedure? Refer to Starting the
Engine on page 196 .
Jump Starting
Although this seems like a simple
procedure, you should take several
precautions.
Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
gauge; the low fuel indicator may
not be working.
There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
(see page 291 ).
If you find nothing wrong, you will
need a qualified technician to find
the problem. See Emergency
Towing on page 296 .
A battery can explode if you do
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames,
and smoking materials away
from the battery.
You cannot start your vehicle by
pushing or pulling it.
284
To Jump Start Your Vehicle:
1. Open the hood, and check the
physical condition of the battery.
In very cold weather, check the
condition of the electrolyte. If it
seems slushy or frozen, do not try
jump starting until it thaws.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
electrolyte inside can f reeze.
Attempting to jump start with a f rozen
battery can cause it to rupture.
2. Turn off all electrical accessories:
heater, A/C, climate control, audio
system, lights, etc. Put the
transmission in Park, and set the
parking brake.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Jump Starting
5. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
6. Start the vehicle. If the starter
motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.
BOOSTER
BATTERY
3. Connect one jumper cable to the
positive (+) terminal on your
vehicle’s battery. Connect the
other end to the positive (+)
terminal on the booster battery.
4. Connect the second jumper cable
to the negative (−) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the grounding strap
as shown. Do not connect this
jumper cable to any other part of
the engine.
Keep the ends of the jumper cables
away from each other and any metal
on the vehicle until everything is
disconnected. Otherwise, you may
cause an electrical short.
285
Taking Care of the Unexpected
The numbers in the illustration show
you the order to connect the jumper
cables.
7. Once your vehicle is running,
disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
positive cable from your vehicle,
then from the booster battery.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the Engine Overheats
The pointer of your vehicle’s
temperature gauge should stay in
the midrange under most conditions.
If it climbs to the red mark, you
should determine the reason (hot
day, driving up a steep hill, etc.).
If the vehicle overheats, you should
take immediate action. The only
indication may be the temperature
gauge climbing to or above the red
mark. Or you may see steam or
spray coming from under the hood.
Driving with the temperature gauge
pointer at the red mark can cause
serious damage to the engine.
286
Steam and spray from an
overheated engine can
seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam
is coming out.
1. Safely pull to the side of the road.
Put the transmission in Park, and
set the parking brake. Turn off all
accessories, and turn on the
hazard warning indicators.
2. If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood, turn
off the engine. Wait until you see
no more signs of steam or spray,
then open the hood.
3. If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running, and
watch the temperature gauge. If
the high heat is due to overloading,
the engine should start to cool
down almost immediately. If it
does, wait until the temperature
gauge comes down to the midpoint,
then continue driving.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the Engine Overheats
4. If the temperature gauge stays at
the red mark, turn off the engine.
5. Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
so use caution. If you find a leak, it
must be repaired before you
continue driving (see Emergency
Towing on page 296 ).
6. If you do not find an obvious leak,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Add coolant
if the level is below the MIN mark.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
8. Using gloves or a large heavy
cloth, turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without pushing
down, to the first stop. After the
pressure releases, push down on
the cap, and turn it until it comes
off.
10.Put the radiator cap back on
tightly. Run the engine, and watch
the temperature gauge. If it goes
back to the red mark, the engine
needs repair (see Emergency
Towing on page 296 ).
11.If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.
287
Taking Care of the Unexpected
7. If there was no coolant in the
reserve tank, you may need to add
coolant to the radiator. Let the
engine cool down until the pointer
reaches the middle of the temperature gauge, or lower, before checking the radiator.
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
9. Start the engine, and set the
temperature to maximum heat
(climate control to AUTO at
‘‘
’’). Add coolant to the
radiator up to the base of the filler
neck. If you do not have the
proper coolant mixture available,
you can add plain water.
Remember to have the cooling
system drained and refilled with
the proper mixture as soon as you
can.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
This indicator should never
come on when the engine is
running. If it starts flashing or stays
on, the oil pressure has dropped very
low or lost pressure. Serious engine
damage is possible, and you should
take immediate action.
1. Safely pull off the road, and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning indicators.
Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn of f
the engine as soon as you can saf ely get
the vehicle stopped.
3. If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page 246 ).
288
2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute.
Open the hood, and check the oil
level (see page 182 ). An engine
very low on oil can lose pressure
during cornering and other driving
maneuvers.
4. Start the engine, and watch the oil
pressure indicator. If it does not go
out within 10 seconds, turn off the
engine. There is a mechanical
problem that needs to be repaired
before you can continue driving
(see Emergency Towing on page
296 ).
Charging System Indicator
If the charging system
indicator comes on brightly
when the engine is running, the
battery is not being charged.
Immediately turn off all electrical
accessories. Try not to use other
electrically operated controls such as
the power windows. Keep the engine
running; starting the engine will
discharge the battery rapidly.
Go to a service station or garage
where you can get technical
assistance.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
If this indicator comes on
while driving, it means one
of the engine’s emissions control
systems may have a problem. Even
though you may feel no difference in
your vehicle’s performance, it can
reduce your fuel economy and cause
increased emissions. Continued
operation may cause serious damage.
If you keep driving with the
malf unction indicator lamp on, you can
damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls and engine. Those repairs may
not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranties.
The indicator may also come on with
the ‘‘D’’ indicator.
Readiness Codes
Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.
If the battery in your vehicle has
been disconnected or gone dead,
these codes are erased. It can take
several days of driving under various
conditions to set the codes again.
To check if they are set, turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, without starting the engine.
The malfunction indicator lamp will
come on for 20 seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set.
If it blinks five times, the readiness
codes are not set. If possible, do not
take your vehicle for a state
emissions test until the readiness
codes are set. Refer to State
Emissions Testing for more
information (see page 310 ).
289
Taking Care of the Unexpected
If you have recently refueled your
vehicle, the indicator could come on
due to a loose or missing fuel fill cap.
You will also see a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL
CAP’’ message on the information
display. Tighten the cap until it clicks
at least once. Tightening the cap will
not turn the indicator turn off
immediately; it can take several days
of normal driving.
If the indicator comes on repeatedly,
even though it may turn off as you
continue driving, have the vehicle
checked by your dealer as soon as
possible.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Brake System Indicator
The brake system
indicator normally
comes on when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position, and as a reminder
to check the parking brake. It will
stay on if you do not fully release the
parking brake.
U.S.
Canada
If the brake system indicator comes
on while driving, the brake fluid level
is probably low. Press lightly on the
brake pedal to see if it feels normal.
If it does, check the brake fluid level
the next time you stop at a service
station (see page 253 ).
If the fluid level is low, take your
vehicle to a dealer, and have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
290
However, if the brake pedal does not
feel normal, you should take
immediate action. A problem in one
part of the system’s dual circuit
design will still give you braking at
two wheels. You will feel the brake
pedal go down much farther before
the vehicle begins to slow down, and
you will have to press harder on the
pedal.
Slow down by shifting to a lower
gear, and pull to the side of the road
when it is safe. Because of the long
distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
should have it towed, and repaired as
soon as possible. (See Emergency
Towing on page 296 .)
If you must drive the vehicle a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and carefully.
If the ABS indicator and the VSA
system indicator come on with the
brake system indicator, have your
vehicle inspected by your dealer
immediately.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fuses
INTERIOR
UNDER-HOOD (PRIMARY)
UNDER-HOOD (SECONDARY)
NOTCH
The vehicle’s fuses are contained in
three fuse boxes.
Checking and Replacing Fuses
If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, check for a
blown fuse first. Determine from the
chart on pages 294 and 295 , or the
diagram on the fuse box lid, which
fuse or fuses control that device.
Check those fuses first, but check all
the fuses before deciding that a
blown fuse is the cause. Replace any
blown fuses, and check if the device
works.
CONTINUED
291
Taking Care of the Unexpected
The interior fuse box is on the
driver’s lower left side. To remove
the fuse box lid, put your finger in
the notch on the lid, and pull it
outward slightly, then pull it toward
you and take it out of its hinges.
The primary under-hood fuse box is
on the passenger’s side. The
secondary fuse box is next to the
brake fluid reservoir. To open them,
push the tabs as shown.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fuses
FUSE
BLOWN
BLOWN
FUSE PULLER
1. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Make sure the
headlights and all other
accessories are off.
2 Remove the cover from the fuse
box.
292
3. Check each of the large fuses in
the primary under-hood fuse box
by looking through the side
window at the wire inside.
Removing these fuses requires a
Phillips-head screwdriver.
4. Check the smaller fuses in the
under-hood fuse boxes and all the
fuses in the interior fuse box by
pulling out each one with the fuse
puller provided in the primary
under-hood fuse box.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fuses
BLOWN
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate anything wrong. Replace the
fuse with one of the correct rating as
soon as you can.
Replacing a f use with one that has a
higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a
replacement f use with the proper
rating f or the circuit, install one with
a lower rating.
6. If the replacement fuse of the
same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem in your vehicle.
Leave the blown fuse in that
circuit and have your vehicle
checked by a qualified technician.
If the driver’s power window fuse is
removed, the AUTO function of the
driver’s window will be disabled. To
reset the AUTO function, see page
106 .
If the radio fuse is removed, the
audio system will disable itself. The
next time you turn on the radio you
will see ‘‘CODE’’ in the frequency
display. Use the preset bars to enter
the code (see page 162 ).
293
Taking Care of the Unexpected
5. Look for a blown wire inside the
fuse. If it is blown, replace the fuse
with one of the spare fuses of the
same rating or lower.
If you cannot drive the vehicle
without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits. Make
sure you can do without that circuit
temporarily (such as the accessory
power socket or radio).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fuse Locations
PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
No. Amps.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
10 A
−
10 A
15 A
10 A
10 A
7.5 A
15 A
15 A
−
15 A
7.5 A
Circuits Protected
Left Headlight Low Beam
Not Used
Left Headlight High Beam
Small Lights
Right Headlight High Beam
Right Headlight Low Beam
Back Up
FI ECU (PCM)
DBW
Not Used
Heated Seat*
MG Clutch
SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
No. Amps.
Circuits Protected
(7.5 A)
20 A
40 A
20 A
15 A
(20 A)
Back Light*
VSA FSR
VSA MTR
VTM-4
Front Accessory Sockets
Electric Brake*
1
2
3
4
5
6
294
No. Amps.
20 A
20 A
40 A
15 A
40 A
−
30 A
30 A
40 A
40 A
120 A
50 A
23
50 A
−
24−28
* : If equipped
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
No. Amps.
(20 A)
7
(7.5 A)
8
(20 A)
9
7.5 A
10
(20 A)
11
* : If equipped
Circuits Protected
Horn, Stop
Defroster
Back Up, ACC
Hazard
Option 1
Not Used
Cooling Fan
Condenser Fan
Heater Motor
Seat
Battery
+B IGI Main
Power Window
Spare Fuses
Circuits Protected
Small Lights*
Stop/Turn Lights*
Charge*
TPMS
Moonroof *
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fuse Locations
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
No. Amps.
7.5 A
15 A
(10 A)
15 A
20 A
10 A
7.5 A
20 A
10 A
7.5 A
30 A
−
(10 A)
(20 A)
−
(20 A)
−
Circuits Protected
Bed Lights
IG Coil
Daytime Running Light*
LAF
Radio
Interior Lights
Back Up
Door Lock
Rear Accessory Socket
OPDS
IG, Wiper
Not Used
Driver’s Power Seat Lumbar**
Driver’s Power Seat Sliding**
Not Used
Driver’s Power Seat Reclining**
Not Used
No. Amps.
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
15 A
15 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
10 A
7.5 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
−
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
(7.5 A)
Circuits Protected
IG ACG
IG Fuel Pump
IG Washer
IG Meter
IG SRS
IGP
Left Rear Window
Right Rear Window
Passenger’s Window
Back Window
Driver’s Window
Not Used
IG HAC
IG VSA/ABS
ACC
Not Used
Taking Care of the Unexpected
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
* : Canadian models
** : If equipped
295
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle needs to be towed,
call a professional towing service or
organization. Never tow your vehicle
with just a rope or chain. It is very
dangerous.
The only way you can safely tow
your vehicle is with flat-bed
equipment. The operator will load
your vehicle on the back of a truck.
Any other method of towing will
damage the drive system. When you
contact the towing agency, inform
them a flat-bed is required.
Towing your vehicle with two tires on
the ground will damage parts of the
4WD system. It should be transported
on a f lat-bed truck or trailer.
296
If, due to damage, your vehicle must
be towed with all four wheels on the
ground, do the following:
Release the parking brake.
Start the engine.
Shift to D for several seconds,
then to N.
Turn off the engine.
Improper towing preparation will
damage the transmission. Follow the
above procedure exactly. If you cannot
shif t the transmission or start the
engine, your vehicle must be
transported with the all f our wheels of f
the ground.
With all four wheels on the ground,
it is best to tow the vehicle no farther
than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the
speed below 35 mph (55 km/h).
The steering system can be damaged if
the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)
position, and make sure the steering
wheel turns f reely bef ore you begin
towing.
Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by the
bumpers will cause serious damage.
The bumpers are not designed to
support the vehicle’s weight.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
If your vehicle gets stuck in sand,
mud, or snow, call a towing service
to pull it out (see the previous page).
‘‘Rocking’’ your vehicle between
f orward and reverse gear or revving up
the engine and allowing the wheels to
spin f reely at high speeds can damage
the automatic transmission. Use a tow
service to prevent transmission damage.
TIE DOWN
HOOK
TIE DOWN
HOOK
REAR
FRONT
CONTINUED
297
Taking Care of the Unexpected
For very short distances, such as
freeing the vehicle, you can use the
tie down hooks on the lower left of
the front and rear bumpers.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
To avoid damage to your vehicle, use
the tie down hooks f or straight, f lat
ground towing only. Do not tow at an
angle. These hooks should not be used
f or open-road towing.
298
Main Menu
Technical Information
The diagrams in this section give
you the dimensions and capacities of
your vehicle and the locations of the
identification numbers. It also
includes information you should
know about your vehicle’s tires and
emissions control systems.
Identification Numbers ................. 300
Specifications ................................. 302
DOT Tire Quality Grading
(U.S. Vehicles) ....................... 304
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading ................................... 304
Treadwear .................................. 304
Traction....................................... 304
Temperature .............................. 305
Tire Labeling .................................. 306
299
Technical Information
Emissions Controls........................ 307
The Clean Air Act ...................... 307
Crankcase Emissions Control
System..................................... 307
Evaporative Emissions Control
System..................................... 307
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery ................................. 307
Exhaust Emissions Controls .... 308
PGM-FI System ..................... 308
Ignition Timing Control
System................................. 308
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
(EGR) System .................... 308
Three Way Catalytic
Converter ............................ 308
Replacement Parts..................... 308
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 309
State Emissions Testing ............... 310
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Identification Numbers
Your vehicle has several identifying
numbers in various places.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
dealer uses to register your vehicle
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
see it by looking through the
windshield on the driver’s side. It is
also on the certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.
CERTIFICATION LABEL
300
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Identification Numbers
The engine number is stamped into
the engine block. It is on the front.
ENGINE NUMBER
The transmission number is on a
label on top of the transmission.
Technical Information
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER
301
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Specifications
Dimensions
Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track
Front
Rear
Weights
Gross vehicle weight rating
Gross combined weight*1
rating (GCWR)
Maximum load limit
(Payload)
206.7 in (5,250 mm)
78.0 in (1,980 mm)
70.3 in (1,785 mm)
122.0 in (3,100 mm)
67.1 in (1,705 mm)
66.9 in (1,700 mm)
See the tire information label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb.
10,088 lbs (4,575 kg)
1,530 lbs (690 kg)*2
1,480 lbs (670 kg)*3
*1 : The GCWR must be reduced 2 percent for every 1,000 feet (305
meters) of elevation.
*2 : On vehicles without moonroof or navigation system
*3 : On vehicles with moonroof and navigation system
Air Conditioning
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant type
302
HFC-134a (R-134a)
21.2−22.9 oz (600−650 g)
ND-OIL8
Capacities
Fuel tank
*1
Change
Total
Change*2
Including
filter
Without
filter
Total
Change
Automatic
transmission Total
fluid
Change
Rear
Total
differential
fluid
Change
Transfer
Total
assembly
fluid
Windshield
washer
reservoir
Engine
coolant
Engine oil
Approx.
22.01 US gal (83.3 )
1.64 US gal (6.2 )
2.14 US gal (8.1 )
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
4.2 US qt (4.0 )
5.3 US qt (5.0 )
3.3 US qt (3.1 )
8.5 US qt (8.0 )
2.79 US qt (2.64 )
3.01 US qt (2.85 )
0.45 US qt (0.43 )
0.48 US qt (0.45 )
4.8 US qt (4.5 )
*1 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine
Reserve tank capacity:
0.16 US gal (0.6 )
*2 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Specifications
Lights
Headlights
High/Low
Front turn signal/Parking/
Hazard lights
Rear turn signal/hazard lights
Brake/Taillights
Back-up lights
License plate lights
High-mount brake lights
Individual map lights
Front
Rear
Bed lights
Console compartment light
Glove box light
Vanity mirror light
Door courtesy lights
Battery
Capacity
12 V − 60/55 W (HB2)
12 V − 28/8 W
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
21 W
21/5 W
18 W
3 CP
3 CP
8W
5W
3 CP
1.4 W
3.4 W
2W
3.8 W
12 V − 72 AH/20 HR
12 V − 60 AH/5 HR
Fuses
Interior
See page 295 or the fuse label
attached to the inside of the fuse
box lid under the dashboard.
See page 294 or the fuse box lid.
Under-hood
Engine
Type
Bore x Stroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs
Alignment
Toe-in
Camber
Tires
Size
Pressure
Front/Rear
Spare
Front/Rear
Spare
0.00 in (0.0 mm)
0.00 in (0.0 mm)
−0°50’
−0°50’
1°53’
P245/65R17 105S
T165/90R17 105M
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
303
Technical Information
Caster
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC VTEC,
V6 gasoline engine
3.50 x 3.66 in (89.0 x 93.0 mm)
211.8 cu-in (3,471 cm )
10.0 : 1
IZFR5K-11
NGK:
DENSO: SKJ16DR-M11
Main Menu
Table of Contents
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all
U.S. Federal Safety Requirements.
All tires are also graded for
treadwear, traction, and temperature
performance according to
Department of Transportation
(DOT) standards. The following
explains these gradings.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between the tread shoulder and the
maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
304
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and onehalf (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices, and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
Traction − AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
Technical Information
Temperature − A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat, and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
Grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
305
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Tire Labeling
The tires that came on your vehicle
have a number of markings. Those
you should be aware of are described
below.
17 − Rim diameter in inches.
FW6X − Tire type code.
105 − Load index (a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry).
2202 − Date of manufacture.
Tire Size
Whenever tires are replaced, they
should be replaced with tires of the
same size. Below is an example of
tire size with an explanation of what
each component means.
P245/65R17 105S
P
− Vehicle type (P indicates
passenger vehicle).
245 − Tire width in millimeters.
65 − Aspect ratio (the tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width).
R
− Tire construction code (R
indicates radial).
306
S
− Speed symbol (an
alphabetical code indicating
the maximum speed rating).
Maximum Tire Pressure
Max Press − The maximum air
pressure the tire can
hold.
Maximum Tire Load
Tire Identification Number
The tire identification number (TIN)
is a group of numbers and letters
that look like the following example
TIN. TIN is located on the sidewall
of the tire.
DOT B97R FW6X 2202
DOT − This indicates that the tire
meets all requirements of
the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
B97R − Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
Max Load − The maximum load the
tire can carry at
maximum air pressure.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Emissions Controls
The burning of gasoline in your
vehicle’s engine produces several byproducts. Some of these are carbon
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen
(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).
Gasoline evaporating from the tank
also produces hydrocarbons. Controlling the production of NOx, CO,
and HC is important to the environment. Under certain conditions of
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’
Carbon monoxide does not contribute to smog creation, but it is a
poisonous gas.
The Clean Air Act
The United States Clean Air Act*
sets standards for automobile
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
work and what to do to maintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
*
In Canada, Honda vehicles comply
with the Canadian emission
requirements, as specified in an
agreement with Environment
Canada, at the time they are
manufactured.
Evaporative Emissions Control
System
As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
tank, an evaporative emissions
control canister filled with charcoal
adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapor is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery
The onboard refueling vapor
recovery (ORVR) system captures
the fuel vapors during refueling. The
vapors are adsorbed in a canister
filled with activated carbon. While
driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
into the engine and burned off.
307
Technical Information
Crankcase Emissions Control
System
Your vehicle has a positive
crankcase ventilation system. This
keeps gasses that build up in the
engine’s crankcase from going into
the atmosphere. The positive
crankcase ventilation valve routes
them from the crankcase back to the
intake manifold. They are then
drawn into the engine and burned.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Emissions Controls
Exhaust Emissions Controls
The exhaust emissions controls
include four systems: PGM-FI,
ignition timing control, exhaust gas
recirculation, and three way catalytic
converter. These four systems work
together to control the engine’s
combustion and minimize the
amount of HC, CO, and NOx that
come out the tailpipe. The exhaust
emissions control systems are
separate from the crankcase and
evaporative emissions control
systems.
Ignition Timing Control System
This system constantly adjusts the
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO, and NOx produced.
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
System
The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)
system takes some of the exhaust
gas and routes it back into the intake
manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the
air/fuel mixture reduces the amount
of NOx produced when the fuel is
burned.
PGM-FI System
Three Way Catalytic Converter
The PGM-FI system uses sequential
multiport fuel injection.
It has three subsystems: air intake,
engine control, and fuel control. The
powertrain control module (PCM)
uses various sensors to determine
how much air is going into the
engine. It then controls how much
fuel to inject under all operating
conditions.
The three way catalytic converter is
in the exhaust system. Through
chemical reactions, it converts HC,
CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen
(N2), and water vapor.
308
Replacement Parts
The emissions control systems are
designed and certified to work together in reducing emissions to
levels that comply with the Clean Air
Act. To make sure the emissions
remain low, you should use only new
Honda replacement parts or their
equivalent for repairs. Using lower
quality parts may increase the
emissions from your vehicle.
The emissions control systems are
covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your vehicle. Read your
warranty manual for more information.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Three Way Catalytic Converter
The three way catalytic converter
contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part
or its equivalent.
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
A defective three way catalytic
converter contributes to air pollution,
and can impair your engine’s performance. Follow these guidelines to
protect your vehicle’s three way
catalytic converter.
WARM UP THREE WAY CATALYTIC
CONVERTERS
Keep the engine well maintained.
Have your vehicle diagnosed and
repaired if it is misfiring, backfiring, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.
Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
309
Technical Information
The three way catalytic converter
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take
place. It can set on fire any
combustible materials that come
near it. Park your vehicle away from
high grass, dry leaves, or other
flammables.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
State Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
If you take your vehicle for a state
emissions test shortly after the
battery has been disconnected or
gone dead, it may not pass the test.
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that must be set in the onboard diagnostics for the emissions
systems. These codes are erased
when the battery is disconnected,
and set again only after several days
of driving under a variety of
conditions.
If the testing facility determines that
the readiness codes are not set, you
will be requested to return at a later
date to complete the test. If you must
get the vehicle retested within the
next two or three days, you can
condition the vehicle for retesting by
doing the following.
Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
but not completely, full (around
3/4).
310
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 6
hours or more.
Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 40° and
95°F.
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, start the engine, and let it
idle for 20 seconds.
Keep the vehicle in Park. Increase
the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and
hold it there until the temperature
gauge rises to at least 1/4 of the
scale (about 3 minutes).
Select a nearby lightly traveled
major highway where you can
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph
(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20
minutes. Drive on the highway in
D. Do not use the cruise control.
When traffic allows, drive for 90
seconds without moving the
accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed
may vary slightly; this is okay.) If
you cannot do this for a
continuous 90 seconds because of
traffic conditions, drive for at least
30 seconds, then repeat it two
more times (for a total of 90
seconds).
Then drive in city/suburban
traffic for at least 10 minutes.
When traffic conditions allow, let
the vehicle coast for several
seconds without using the
accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal.
Stop the vehicle, turn off the
ignition switch, and leave it off for
30 minutes.
If the testing facility determines the
readiness codes are still not set, see
your dealer.
Main Menu
Warranty and Customer Relations
311
Warranty and Customer Relations
Customer Service
Information ................................. 312
Warranty Coverages ..................... 313
Reporting Safety Defects
(U.S. Vehicles) ........................... 314
Authorized Manuals ...................... 315
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Customer Service Information
Honda dealership personnel are
trained professionals. They should
be able to answer all your questions.
If you encounter a problem that your
dealership does not solve to your
satisfaction, please discuss it with
the dealership’s management. The
service manager or general manager
can help. Almost all problems are
solved in this way.
Canadian Owners:
CUSTOMER RELATIONS
RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÉLE
Honda Canada Inc.
715 Milner Avenue
Toronto, ON
M1B 2K8
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909
Toronto (416) 287-4776
If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact your Honda
Customer Service Office.
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:
U.S. Owners:
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Automobile Customer Service
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A
1919 Torrance Boulevard
Torrance, California 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009
312
When you call or write, please give
us this information:
Vehicle identification number (see
page 300 )
Name and address of the dealer
who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
Mileage on your vehicle
Tel: (787) 620-7098
Your name, address, and
telephone number
A detailed description of the
problem
Name of the dealer who sold the
vehicle to you
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by these
warranties:
Emissions Control Systems Defects
Warranty and Emissions
Performance Warranty − these two
warranties cover your vehicle’s
emissions control systems. Time,
mileage, and coverage are
conditional. Please read your
warranty booklet for exact
information.
Original Equipment Battery Limited
Warranty − this warranty gives up
to 100 % credit toward a replacement
battery.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
− all exterior body panels are
covered for rust-through from the
inside for the specified time period
with no mileage limit.
Accessory Limited Warranty −
Honda accessories are covered
under this warranty. Time and
mileage limits depend on the type of
accessory and other factors. Please
read your warranty booklet for
details.
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty − covers all Honda
replacement parts against defects in
materials and workmanship.
Replacement Battery Limited
Warranty − provides prorated
coverage for a replacement battery
purchased from your dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime
Limited Warranty − provides
coverage for as long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the
vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
all these warranties. Please read the
2007 Honda warranty information
booklet that came with your vehicle
for precise information on warranty
coverages. Your vehicle’s original
tires are covered by their
manufacturer. Tire warranty
information is in a separate booklet.
Canadian Owners
Please refer to the 2007 warranty
manual that came with your vehicle.
313
Warranty and Customer Relations
New Vehicle Limited Warranty −
covers your new vehicle, except for
the battery, emissions control
systems, and accessories, against
defects in materials and
workmanship.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty − a seat
belt that fails to function properly is
covered by a limited warranty.
Please read your warranty booklet
for details.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA), in addition
to notifying American Honda Motor
Co., Inc.
314
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to: Administrator, NHTSA,
400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington,
DC 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm
Incorporated. You can order in any of three ways:
Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this page
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)
Go online at www. helminc. com
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.
at 1-800-782-4356.
Publication
Form Number
61SJC01
61SJC30
31SJC611
31SJC800
31SJCQ10
31SJCM10
HON-R
*
2006-07 Honda Ridgeline
Service Manual Base Book
2006-07 Honda Ridgeline
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
2006-07 Honda Ridgeline
Body Repair Manual
2007 Honda Ridgeline
Owner’s Manual
2007 Honda Ridgeline Navigation Manual
2007 Honda Ridgeline
Quick Start Guide
2007 Ridgeline Honda Service History
Order Form for Previous YearsIndicate Year and Model Desired
Price
Each*
$70.00
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)
Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. − 6:00 P.M. EST
MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00
OR
By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You can
pay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail to
Helm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.
$50.00
$44.00
VEHICLE MODEL
2
0
0
7
PUBLICATION NUMBER
Price
Total
Each*
Price
Qty
Name
Year
$34.00
$29.00
$12.00
$12.00
FREE
Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation.
H
O
N
*
Prices are subject to change without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Orders are mailed within 10 days. Please
allow adequate time for delivery.
TOTAL MATERIAL
Mich. Purchases
Add 6% Sales Tax
HANDLING CHARGE
$6.95
GRAND TOTAL
315
Authorized Manuals
61SJC01EL
Form Description
Valid only for sales within the United States. Canadian
owners should contact their authorized Honda dealer.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Authorized Manuals
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,
and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should
be sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shown
below for a quotation.
S
H
I
P
T
O
Customer Name
Attention
Street Address − No P.O. Box Number
Apartment Number
City
State & Zip Code
Daytime Telephone Number
P
A
Y
M
E
N
T
(
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
This manual complements the service manual by
providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each
electrical circuit in your vehicle.
)
Body Repair Manual:
This manual describes the procedures involved in the
replacement of damaged body parts.
Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc − U.S. funds only.
Do not send cash
Master
Card
VISA
Check here if your billing address is different
from the shipping address shown above.
Account Number
Expiration: Mo. Yr.
−
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
DATE
These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14
days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.
P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356
316
Service Manual:
This manual covers maintenance and recommended
procedures for repair to engine and chassis components.
It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simple
enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to understand.
Main Menu
Index
A
B
Back Window
Indicator ........................................ 69
Operation .................................... 105
Battery
Charging System
Indicator............................ 62, 288
Jump Starting ............................. 284
Maintenance ............................... 270
Specifications ............................. 303
Bed Lights
Indicator ........................................ 69
Operation .................................... 120
Before Driving ............................... 177
Belts, Seat ..................................... 8, 19
Beverage Holders .......................... 114
Booster Seats ................................... 50
Brakes
Anti-lock System (ABS) ............ 208
Break-in, New Linings .............. 178
Fluid ............................................ 253
Bulb Replacement ............. 257, 258
Parking ........................................ 109
System Indicator .................. 63, 290
Wear Indicators ......................... 207
Braking System.............................. 207
Break-in, New Vehicle .................. 178
Brightness Control, Instruments ... 78
Brights, Headlights ......................... 76
INDEX
Accessories and Modifications .... 184
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key
Position) ........................................ 82
Accessory Power Sockets............. 116
Additives, Engine Oil..................... 247
Adjusting the Steering wheel ......... 79
Advanced Airbags............................ 25
Airbag (SRS) ...................................... 9
Air Conditioning System ............... 122
Usage .......................................... 123
Air Outlets (Vents) ................ 124, 129
Air Pressure, Tires ........................ 266
Antifreeze ....................................... 249
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Indicator ................................ 63, 208
Operation .................................... 208
Anti-theft, Audio System............... 162
Anti-theft Steering Column Lock .. 82
Armrests ......................................... 101
Audio System ................. 133, 142, 159
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ...... 84
Automatic Heated Wiper
Zone ....................................... 76, 127
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners .... 19
Automatic Speed Control.............. 165
Automatic Transmission............... 197
Capacity, Fluid ........................... 302
Checking Fluid Level ................ 251
Shifting ........................................ 197
Shift Lever Position
Indicators ................................ 197
Shift Lever Positions ................. 198
Shift Lock Release ..................... 202
Auxiliary Input Jack ....................... 161
CONTINUED
I
Main Menu
Index
Bulb Replacement
Back-up Lights ........................... 257
Brake Lights............................... 257
Bed Lights .................................. 260
Front Turn Signal /Parking/
Hazard Lights ........................ 256
Headlights .................................. 255
High-mount Brake Light .......... 258
License Plate Lights .................. 259
Rear Bulbs (Brake/Taillights,
Turn Signal/Hazard Lights,
Back-up Lights) ................. 257
Specifications ............................. 303
Bulbs, Halogen ............................... 255
C
Capacities Chart............................. 302
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 53
Cargo Hooks ............................ 97, 114
Carrying Cargo .............................. 186
CAUTION, Explanation of .............. iii
CD Care .......................................... 161
CD Changer ........................... 152, 153
CD Player/Changer Error
Messages .................................... 162
II
CD Player........................................ 151
Certification Label ......................... 300
Chains, tire ..................................... 269
Change Oil
How to ......................................... 247
When to....................................... 235
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 275
Charging System Indicator .... 62, 288
Checklist, Before Driving ............. 195
Childproof Door Locks ................... 84
Child Safety ...................................... 32
Booster Seats ............................... 50
Child Seats .................................... 39
Important Safety Reminders ...... 32
Infants ........................................... 37
Larger Children ........................... 49
LATCH.......................................... 41
Risks with Airbags....................... 33
Small Children.............................. 38
Tether ..................................... 41, 46
Where Should a Child Sit? .......... 33
Child Seats ........................................ 39
LATCH.......................................... 41
Tether Anchorage Points ........... 46
Climate Control System ................ 122
Clock ............................................... 163
Coat Hooks ..................................... 115
Code, Audio System ...................... 162
CO in the Exhaust ......................... 307
Compact Spare Tire....................... 274
Compass.......................................... 168
Console Compartment .................. 113
Consumer Information.................. 312
Controls, Instruments and .............. 57
Coolant
Adding ......................................... 249
Checking ..................................... 182
Proper Solution .......................... 249
Temperature Gauge .................... 72
Courtesy Light ............................... 118
Crankcase Emissions Control
System......................................... 307
Cruise Control
Indicator ........................................ 65
Operation .................................... 165
Cup Holders.................................... 114
Customer Service Office .............. 312
D
DANGER, Explanation of ................ iii
Dashboard .................................... 3, 58
Main Menu
Index
Dual Temperature Control ........... 130
Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 262
E
Economy, Fuel ............................... 183
Emergencies................................... 273
Battery, Jump Starting .............. 284
Brake System Indicator ............ 290
Changing a Flat Tire ................. 275
Charging System Indicator ...... 288
Checking the Fuses................... 291
Hazard Warning Flashers .......... 79
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ...... 288
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 289
Overheated Engine ................... 286
Stuck Vehicle ............................. 297
Towing ........................................ 296
Emergency Brake .......................... 109
Emissions Controls........................ 307
Engine
Coolant Temperature Gauge ..... 72
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp ................................. 62, 289
Oil Life Display .......................... 235
Oil Pressure Indicator ......... 62, 288
Oil, What Kind to Use ............... 246
Overheating................................ 286
Specifications ............................. 303
Speed Limiter ............................. 201
Starting........................................ 196
Engine, if it won’t start .................. 283
Evaporative Emissions Control
System......................................... 307
Exhaust Fumes ................................ 53
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
System......................................... 308
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
Belts by ......................................... 16
F
Fan, Interior.................................... 123
Features .......................................... 121
Filling the Fuel Tank ..................... 179
Filters
Dust and Pollen .......................... 262
Oil ................................................ 248
Flashers, Hazard Warning.............. 79
Flat Tire, Changing a .................... 275
CONTINUED
III
INDEX
Daytime Running Lights................. 78
Dead Battery .................................. 284
Defects, Reporting Safety* .......... 314
Defrosting the Windows ............... 127
Differential Fluid, Rear ................. 252
Dimensions ..................................... 302
Dimming the Headlights ................ 76
Dipstick
Automatic Transmission........... 251
Engine Oil ................................... 182
Directional Signals ........................... 76
Disc Brake Wear Indicators ......... 207
Disposal of Used Oil ...................... 248
Door and Tailgate Open Monitor .. 64
Doors
Locking and Unlocking... 83, 84, 86
Lockout Prevention ..................... 83
Power Door Locks ....................... 83
DOT Tire Quality Grading* ......... 304
Driver and Passenger Safety ............ 5
Driving ............................................ 193
Economy ..................................... 183
D3 .................................................... 199
Dual-Action Tailgate
Indicator .................................. 64, 94
Operation ...................................... 92
Main Menu
Index
Floor Mats ...................................... 261
Fluids
Automatic Transmission........... 251
Brake ........................................... 253
Power Steering........................... 254
Rear Differential ........................ 252
Transfer Assembly .................... 253
Windshield Washer ................... 250
FM Stereo Radio
Reception .................................... 140
Folding the Rear Seats .................. 103
Four-way Flashers ........................... 79
Front Seat ......................................... 98
Adjusting............................... 98, 100
Airbags .......................................... 23
Heaters........................................ 104
Fuel .................................................. 178
Fill Door and Cap....................... 179
Gauge ............................................ 71
Octane Requirement ................. 178
Oxygenated ................................ 178
Reserve Indicator......................... 65
Tank, Filling the......................... 179
Fuses, Checking the ...................... 291
G
Gas Mileage, Improving................ 183
Gasoline
Fuel Reserve Indicator ................ 65
Gauge ............................................ 71
Octane Requirement ................. 178
Tank, Filling the......................... 179
Gas Station Procedures................. 179
Gauges
Engine Coolant Temperature .... 72
Fuel ................................................ 71
Speedometer ................................ 70
Tachometer .................................. 70
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating) ........................................ 213
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
Rating) ........................................ 213
Gearshift Lever Positions ............. 198
Glove Box ....................................... 115
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) ........................................ 213
Hazard Warning Flashers............... 79
Headlights .................................. 75, 76
Aiming ......................................... 255
Automatic Lighting Off ............... 77
Control Dial .................................. 76
Daytime Running Lights** ........ 78
High Beam Indicator ................... 65
High Beams, Turning on ...... 75, 76
Low Beams, Turning on ............. 76
Reminder Chime .......................... 77
Replacing Halogen Bulbs ......... 255
Turning On ................................... 76
Head Restraints ............................. 102
Heated Mirrors .............................. 111
Heaters, Seats ................................ 104
Heating and Cooling ...................... 123
High-Low Beam Switch .................. 75
HomeLink Universal
Transceiver................................. 171
Hood, Opening the ........................ 181
Horn................................................... 74
I
H
Identification Number, Vehicle.... 300
Halogen Headlight Bulbs.............. 255
IV
Main Menu
Index
Low Oil Pressure ......................... 62
Low Tire Pressure ....................... 68
Maintenance Minder ................... 67
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) ........................................ 62
Side Airbag Off ............................ 62
Seat Belt ........................................ 61
SRS ................................................ 62
Tailgate Open ............................... 64
Tire Pressure Monitor ................ 68
TPMS System .............................. 68
Turn Signal and Hazard
Warning .................................... 64
VSA Activation ............................. 67
VSA System .................................. 67
VTM-4 ........................................... 66
Washer Level ............................... 65
Individual Map Lights ................... 119
Infant Restraint ................................ 37
Infant Seats ....................................... 37
Inflation, Proper Tire .................... 266
Information Display ......................... 70
Engine Oil Life Indicator .......... 235
Maintenance Items............ 238, 242
Inside Mirror .................................. 110
Inspection, Tire .............................. 266
Instrument Panel ......................... 3, 58
Instrument Panel Brightness ......... 78
Interior Lights ................................ 118
Introduction ......................................... i
J
Jacking Up the Vehicle ................. 277
Jack, Tire ........................................ 275
Jump Starting ................................. 284
K
Keys ................................................... 80
L
Label, Certification ........................ 300
Lane Change, Signaling .................. 76
Lap/Shoulder Belts ................... 14, 19
Light Control Dial ............................ 76
INDEX
Ignition
Keys............................................... 80
Switch ............................................ 82
Timing Control System ............. 308
Immobilizer System......................... 81
Important Safety Precautions .......... 6
In-Bed Trunk .................................... 95
Emergency Opener ..................... 96
Open Indicator ............................. 69
Indicators, Instrument Panel .......... 59
ABS (Anti-lock Brake) ................ 63
A/T Temperature ........................ 66
Back Window Open ..................... 69
Bed Lights On .............................. 69
Brake (Parking and Brake
System) ..................................... 63
Charging System ......................... 62
Cruise Control .............................. 65
Door Open .................................... 64
DRL (Daytime Running
Lights)**................................... 65
High Beam .................................... 65
In-Bed Trunk Open ..................... 69
Key (Immobilizer System) ......... 63
Lights On ...................................... 66
Low Fuel ....................................... 65
CONTINUED
V
Main Menu
Index
Lights
Bulb Replacement ..................... 255
Indicator ........................................ 66
Interior ........................................ 118
Parking .......................................... 76
Turn Signal ................................... 76
Load Limits............................. 187, 212
LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ....... 82
Locks
Anti-theft Steering Column ........ 82
Fuel Fill Door ............................. 179
Glove Box ................................... 115
In-Bed Trunk ................................ 95
Lockout Prevention ..................... 83
Power Door .................................. 83
Low Coolant Level ......................... 182
Low Fuel Indicator .......................... 65
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .... 62, 288
Lubricant Specifications Chart .... 302
Luggage, Storing (Cargo) ............ 186
M
Maintenance ................................... 233
Owner’s Maintenance
Checks .................................... 241
VI
Record .................................. 243-244
Minder ................................. 235-242
Minder Indicator .......................... 67
Safety........................................... 234
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .. 62, 289
Manual Seat Adjustments............... 98
Meters, Gauges ................................ 70
Mirrors, Adjusting ......................... 111
Modifying Your Vehicle................ 185
Moonroof ........................................ 108
Change, When to ....................... 235
Checking Engine ....................... 182
Filter ............................................ 247
Pressure Indicator ............... 62, 288
Selecting Proper Viscosity
Chart ....................................... 246
ON (Ignition Key Position) ............ 82
Outside Mirrors ............................. 111
Overheating, Engine ..................... 286
Owner’s Maintenance Checks ..... 241
Oxygenated Fuels.......................... 178
N
P
Neutral Gear Position.................... 199
New Vehicle Break-in ................... 178
NOTICE, Explanation of .................... i
Numbers, Identification ................ 300
O
Octane Requirement, Gasoline .... 178
Odometer .......................................... 70
Off-Highway Driving ..................... 227
Off-Road Precautions .................... 228
Oil
Change, How to ......................... 247
Panel Brightness Control ............... 78
Park Gear Position......................... 198
Parking ............................................ 206
Parking Brake ................................ 109
Parking Lights.................................. 76
Parking Over Things that Burn ... 309
PGM-FI System.............................. 308
Pickup Bed
Carrying Cargo .......................... 189
Lights .......................................... 120
Power Seat Adjustments ............... 100
Power Socket Locations................ 116
Main Menu
Index
Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts .......... 16
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 11
Additional Safety Precautions .... 17
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 16
Protecting Children ......................... 32
General Guidelines ...................... 32
Protecting Infants ........................ 37
Protecting Larger Children ........ 49
Protecting Small Children .......... 38
Using Child Seats with
Tethers...................................... 46
Using LATCH .............................. 41
R
S
Safety Belts................................... 8, 19
Safety Defects, Reporting* .......... 314
Safety Features .................................. 7
Airbags ............................................ 9
Door Locks ................................... 11
Head Restraints ........................... 13
Seat Belts .................................. 8, 18
Seats and Seat-Backs ............ 11, 12
Safety Labels, Location of .............. 54
Safety Messages ............................... iii
Satellite Radio, XM* ...................... 142
Seat Belts ...................................... 8, 18
Additional Information ................ 18
Automatic Seat Belt
Tensioners ................................ 19
Cleaning ...................................... 261
Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 19
Maintenance ................................. 20
Reminder Light and
Beeper ................................. 18, 61
System Components.................... 18
Use During Pregnancy................ 16
Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt .... 14
Seats .................................................. 98
Adjusting the Seat ............... 98, 100
Folding the Rear Seats .............. 103
Head Restraints ......................... 102
Heater ......................................... 104
Security System ............................. 164
Serial Number ................................ 300
Service Intervals ............................ 242
Service Manual, Purchasing* ....... 315
Service Station Procedures .......... 179
CONTINUED
VII
INDEX
Radiator Overheating .................... 286
Radio/CD Sound
System ........................ 133, 142, 148
Rear Differential Fluid .................. 252
Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement ... 257
Rear View Mirror........................... 110
Rear View Mirror with
Compass...................................... 168
Rear (Back) Window ..................... 106
Reclining the Seat-Backs ........ 98, 100
Remote Audio Controls................. 161
Remote Transmitter ........................ 89
Replacement Information
Engine Oil and Filter ................. 247
Fuses ........................................... 291
Light Bulbs ................................. 255
Minder......................................... 242
Timing Belt ................................. 254
Tires ............................................ 275
Wiper Blades .............................. 262
Replacing Seat Belts After a
Crash ............................................. 20
Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant .... 182
Reverse Gear Position................... 198
Rotation, Tire ................................. 267
Main Menu
Index
Shifting the Automatic
Transmission .............................. 197
Shift Lever Position Indicators .... 197
Shift Lock Release ......................... 202
Side Airbags ..................................... 26
Side Curtain Airbags ....................... 28
Side Marker (Parking)
Lights, Bulb Replacement in .... 256
Signaling Turns ................................ 76
Snow Tires ...................................... 269
Sound System................. 133, 142, 148
Spare Tire
Inflating............................... 265, 274
Specifications ..................... 269, 303
Specifications Charts..................... 302
Speed Control ................................. 165
Speedometer .................................... 70
SRS, Additional Information........... 21
Additional Safety Precautions .... 31
Airbag System Components ....... 21
Airbag Service .............................. 30
How the Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 29
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 29
How the SRS Indicator Works ... 28
VIII
How Your Front Airbags
Work.......................................... 23
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 26
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work.......................................... 28
SRS Indicator.............................. 28, 62
START (Ignition Key Position) ..... 82
Starting the Engine........................ 196
With a Dead Battery ................. 284
State Emissions Testing ............... 310
Steam Coming from Engine ......... 286
Steering Wheel
Adjustment ................................... 79
Anti-theft Column Lock .............. 82
Stereo Sound System .... 133, 142, 148
Storing Your Vehicle ..................... 272
Stuck Vehicle ................................. 297
Sun Visor......................................... 117
Sunglasses Holder ......................... 115
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS)
Servicing ....................................... 30
SRS Indicator.......................... 28, 62
System Components.................... 21
Synthetic Oil ................................... 247
T
Tachometer ...................................... 70
Tailgate, Dual-Action
Indicator .................................. 64, 94
Operation ...................................... 92
Taillights, Changing Bulbs in ....... 257
Taking Care of the Unexpected .. 273
Technical Descriptions
DOT Tire Quality Grading* ..... 304
Emissions Control Systems ...... 307
Three Way Catalytic
Converter ................................ 309
Temperature Gauge ........................ 72
Tensioners, Seat Belts .................... 19
Theft Protection............................. 162
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 309
Timing Belt ..................................... 254
Tire Chains ..................................... 269
Tire, How to Change a Flat .......... 275
Tire Labeling .................................. 306
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) ..................... 204
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator............................ 68, 204
Main Menu
Index
Transfer Assembly Fluid .............. 253
Transmission
Checking Fluid Level ................ 251
Fluid Selection............................ 252
Identification Number............... 301
Shifting the Automatic .............. 197
Treadwear ...................................... 304
Trip Meter ........................................ 71
Trunk, In-Bed ................................... 95
Turn Signals ..................................... 76
U
Unexpected, Taking Care
of the ........................................... 273
Uniform Tire Quality Grading* ... 304
Unleaded Gasoline......................... 178
Used Oil, How to Dispose of ........ 248
V
Vanity Mirror ................................. 117
Vehicle Capacity Load .......... 187, 302
Vehicle Dimensions....................... 302
Vehicle Identification Number..... 300
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
System..................................... 210
VSA System Indicator ......... 67, 210
VSA Activation Indicator .... 67, 210
VSA Off Switch .......................... 211
Vehicle Storage .............................. 272
Ventilation ...................................... 125
VIN .................................................. 300
Viscosity, Oil................................... 246
VTM-4 Lock ................................... 203
W
WARNING, Explanation of ............. iii
Warning Labels, Location of .......... 54
Warranty Coverages* ................... 313
Washer, Windshield
Checking the Fluid Level ......... 250
Level Indicator ............................. 65
Operation ...................................... 75
Wheels ............................................ 264
Adjusting the Steering ................ 79
Wrench ....................................... 276
CONTINUED
IX
INDEX
Required Federal
Explanation............................. 175
Tire Pressure Monitor ........ 68, 205
TPMS Indicator ................... 68, 205
Tires ................................................ 265
Air Pressure ............................... 266
Checking Wear .......................... 266
Compact Spare ........................... 274
DOT Tire Quality Grading* ..... 304
Inflation ....................................... 265
Inspection ................................... 266
Maintenance ............................... 267
Replacing .................................... 268
Rotating....................................... 267
Snow ............................................ 269
Specifications ..................... 269, 303
Tire Chains ................................. 269
Tools, Tire Changing .................... 275
Towing
A Trailer ...................................... 212
Emergency Wrecker ................. 296
Equipment .................................. 220
Equipment and Accessories ..... 216
Weight Limit .............................. 212
Trailer Loading .......................... 214
Trailer Towing Tips .................. 220
Main Menu
Index
Windows
Operating the Power ................. 105
Windshield
Defroster .................................... 125
Washers ........................................ 75
Wiper Zone, Heated ............ 76, 127
Wipers, Windshield
Changing Blades ........................ 262
Operation ...................................... 75
Worn Tires ..................................... 266
Wrecker, Emergency Towing ...... 296
X
XM Satellite Radio* ....................... 142
*
: U.S. only
X
Main Menu
Service Information Summary
Gasoline:
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane
number of 87 or higher.
Fuel Tank Capacity:
22.01 US gal (83.3 )
Recommended Engine Oil:
API Premium grade 5W-20
detergent oil (see page 246 ).
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
Automatic Transmission Fluid:
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid) preferred, or
a DEXRON III ATF as a
temporary replacement (see page
251 ).
Power Steering Fluid:
Honda Power Steering Fluid
preferred, or another brand of
power steering fluid as a
temporary replacement. Do not
use ATF (see page 254 ).
Brake Fluid:
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page 253 ).
Rear Differential Fluid:
Honda VTM-4 Differential Fluid
(see page 252 ).
Transfer Assembly Fluid:
SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90 viscosity
hypoid gear oil, API service
classified GL4 or GL5 only (see
page 253 ).
Tire Pressure (measured cold):
Front/Rear:
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
Compact Spare Tire:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement